S/390: Add support for z15 as CPU name.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BPF
44 @set BPF
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
238 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
239 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
240 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
241 [@b{--statistics}]
242 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
243 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
244 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
245 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
246 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
247 [@b{--generate-missing-build-notes=[no|yes]}]
248 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
249 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
250 @c
251 @c man end
252 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
253 @c Add an empty line for separation.
254 @c man begin TARGET
255 @ifset AARCH64
256
257 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
258 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
259 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
260 @end ifset
261 @ifset ALPHA
262
263 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
264 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
265 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
266 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
267 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
268 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
269 @end ifset
270 @ifset ARC
271
272 @emph{Target ARC options:}
273 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
274 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
275 [@b{-mcode-density}]
276 [@b{-mrelax}]
277 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
278 @end ifset
279 @ifset ARM
280
281 @emph{Target ARM options:}
282 @c Don't document the deprecated options
283 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
284 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
285 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
286 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
287 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
288 [@b{-mthumb}]
289 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
290 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
291 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
292 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
293 @end ifset
294 @ifset Blackfin
295
296 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
297 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
298 [@b{-mfdpic}]
299 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
300 [@b{-mnopic}]
301 @end ifset
302 @ifset BPF
303
304 @emph{Target BPF options:}
305 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}]
306 @end ifset
307 @ifset CRIS
308
309 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
310 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
311 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
312 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
313 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
314 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
315 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
316 @end ifset
317 @ifset CSKY
318
319 @emph{Target C-SKY options:}
320 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
321 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-mlittle-endian}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-mbig-endian}]
322 [@b{-fpic}] [@b{-pic}]
323 [@b{-mljump}] [@b{-mno-ljump}]
324 [@b{-force2bsr}] [@b{-mforce2bsr}] [@b{-no-force2bsr}] [@b{-mno-force2bsr}]
325 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-mjsri2bsr}] [@b{-no-jsri2bsr }] [@b{-mno-jsri2bsr}]
326 [@b{-mnolrw }] [@b{-mno-lrw}]
327 [@b{-melrw}] [@b{-mno-elrw}]
328 [@b{-mlaf }] [@b{-mliterals-after-func}]
329 [@b{-mno-laf}] [@b{-mno-literals-after-func}]
330 [@b{-mlabr}] [@b{-mliterals-after-br}]
331 [@b{-mno-labr}] [@b{-mnoliterals-after-br}]
332 [@b{-mistack}] [@b{-mno-istack}]
333 [@b{-mhard-float}] [@b{-mmp}] [@b{-mcp}] [@b{-mcache}]
334 [@b{-msecurity}] [@b{-mtrust}]
335 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-medsp}] [@b{-mvdsp}]
336 @end ifset
337 @ifset D10V
338
339 @emph{Target D10V options:}
340 [@b{-O}]
341 @end ifset
342 @ifset D30V
343
344 @emph{Target D30V options:}
345 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
346 @end ifset
347 @ifset EPIPHANY
348
349 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
350 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
351 @end ifset
352 @ifset H8
353
354 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
355 [-h-tick-hex]
356 @end ifset
357 @ifset HPPA
358 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
359 @end ifset
360 @ifset I80386
361
362 @emph{Target i386 options:}
363 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
364 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
365 @end ifset
366 @ifset IA64
367
368 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
369 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
370 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
371 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
372 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
373 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
374 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
375 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
376 @end ifset
377 @ifset IP2K
378
379 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
380 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
381 @end ifset
382 @ifset M32C
383
384 @emph{Target M32C options:}
385 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
386 @end ifset
387 @ifset M32R
388
389 @emph{Target M32R options:}
390 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
391 @b{--W[n]p}]
392 @end ifset
393 @ifset M680X0
394
395 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
396 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
397 @end ifset
398 @ifset M68HC11
399
400 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
401 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
402 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
403 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
404 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
405 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
406 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
407 @end ifset
408 @ifset MCORE
409
410 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
411 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
412 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
413 @end ifset
414 @ifset METAG
415
416 @emph{Target Meta options:}
417 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
418 @end ifset
419 @ifset MICROBLAZE
420 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
421 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
422 @end ifset
423 @ifset MIPS
424
425 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
426 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
427 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
428 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
429 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
430 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
431 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
432 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
433 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
434 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
435 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
436 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
437 [@b{-mignore-branch-isa}] [@b{-mno-ignore-branch-isa}]
438 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
439 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
440 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
441 [@b{-mmips16e2}] [@b{-mno-mips16e2}]
442 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
443 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
444 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
445 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
446 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
447 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
448 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
449 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
450 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
451 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
452 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
453 [@b{-mcrc}] [@b{-mno-crc}]
454 [@b{-mginv}] [@b{-mno-ginv}]
455 [@b{-mloongson-mmi}] [@b{-mno-loongson-mmi}]
456 [@b{-mloongson-cam}] [@b{-mno-loongson-cam}]
457 [@b{-mloongson-ext}] [@b{-mno-loongson-ext}]
458 [@b{-mloongson-ext2}] [@b{-mno-loongson-ext2}]
459 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
460 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
461 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
462 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
463 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
464 [@b{-mfix-r5900}] [@b{-mno-fix-r5900}]
465 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
466 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
467 @end ifset
468 @ifset MMIX
469
470 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
471 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
472 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
473 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
474 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
475 @end ifset
476 @ifset NIOSII
477
478 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
479 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
480 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
481 @end ifset
482 @ifset NDS32
483
484 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
485 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
486 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
487 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
488 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
489 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
490 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
491 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
492 [@b{-mb2bb}]
493 @end ifset
494 @ifset OPENRISC
495 @c OpenRISC has no machine-dependent assembler options.
496 @end ifset
497 @ifset PDP11
498
499 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
500 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
501 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
502 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
503 @end ifset
504 @ifset PJ
505
506 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
507 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
508 @end ifset
509 @ifset PPC
510
511 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
512 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
513 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
514 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mgekko}|
515 @b{-mbroadway}|@b{-mppc64}|@b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|
516 @b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|@b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|
517 @b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|@b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
518 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mspe2}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
519 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
520 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
521 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
522 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
523 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
524 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
525 @end ifset
526 @ifset PRU
527
528 @emph{Target PRU options:}
529 [@b{-link-relax}]
530 [@b{-mnolink-relax}]
531 [@b{-mno-warn-regname-label}]
532 @end ifset
533 @ifset RISCV
534
535 @emph{Target RISC-V options:}
536 [@b{-fpic}|@b{-fPIC}|@b{-fno-pic}]
537 [@b{-march}=@var{ISA}]
538 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
539 @end ifset
540 @ifset RL78
541
542 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
543 [@b{-mg10}]
544 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
545 @end ifset
546 @ifset RX
547
548 @emph{Target RX options:}
549 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
550 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
551 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
552 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
553 [@b{-mpid}]
554 [@b{-mrelax}]
555 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
556 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
557 @end ifset
558 @ifset S390
559
560 @emph{Target s390 options:}
561 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
562 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
563 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
564 @end ifset
565 @ifset SCORE
566
567 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
568 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
569 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
570 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
571 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
572 @end ifset
573 @ifset SPARC
574
575 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
576 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
577 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
578 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
579 @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
580 @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
581 @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
582 @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
583 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
584 @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
585 @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
586 @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
587 @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
588 @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
589 @b{-bump}]
590 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
591 [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
592 @end ifset
593 @ifset TIC54X
594
595 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
596 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
597 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
598 @end ifset
599 @ifset TIC6X
600
601 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
602 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
603 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
604 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
605 @end ifset
606 @ifset TILEGX
607
608 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
609 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
610 @end ifset
611 @ifset TILEPRO
612 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
613 @end ifset
614 @ifset VISIUM
615
616 @emph{Target Visium options:}
617 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
618 @end ifset
619 @ifset XTENSA
620
621 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
622 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
623 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
624 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
625 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
626 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
627 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
628 @end ifset
629 @ifset Z80
630
631 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
632 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
633 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
634 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
635 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
636 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
637 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
638 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
639 @end ifset
640 @ifset Z8000
641
642 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
643 @end ifset
644
645 @c man end
646 @end smallexample
647
648 @c man begin OPTIONS
649
650 @table @gcctabopt
651 @include at-file.texi
652
653 @item -a[cdghlmns]
654 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
655
656 @table @gcctabopt
657 @item -ac
658 omit false conditionals
659
660 @item -ad
661 omit debugging directives
662
663 @item -ag
664 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
665
666 @item -ah
667 include high-level source
668
669 @item -al
670 include assembly
671
672 @item -am
673 include macro expansions
674
675 @item -an
676 omit forms processing
677
678 @item -as
679 include symbols
680
681 @item =file
682 set the name of the listing file
683 @end table
684
685 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
686 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
687 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
688
689 @item --alternate
690 Begin in alternate macro mode.
691 @ifclear man
692 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
693 @end ifclear
694
695 @item --compress-debug-sections
696 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
697 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
698 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
699 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
700
701 @ifset ELF
702 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
703 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
704 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
705 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
706 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
707 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
708 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
709 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
710 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
711 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
712 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
713 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
714 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
715 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
716 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
717
718 @end ifset
719
720 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
721 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
722 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
723 override this.
724
725 @item -D
726 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
727 other assemblers.
728
729 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
730 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
731 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
732
733 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
734 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
735 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
736 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
737 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
738 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
739
740 @item -f
741 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
742 compiler output).
743
744 @item -g
745 @itemx --gen-debug
746 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
747 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
748 ECOFF or DWARF2.
749
750 @item --gstabs
751 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
752 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
753
754 @item --gstabs+
755 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
756 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
757 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
758 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
759 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
760
761 @item --gdwarf-2
762 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
763 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
764 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
765
766 @item --gdwarf-sections
767 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
768 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
769 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
770 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
771 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
772 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
773 suffix.
774
775 @ifset ELF
776 @item --size-check=error
777 @itemx --size-check=warning
778 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
779
780 @item --elf-stt-common=no
781 @itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
782 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
783 symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled
784 by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
785
786 @item --generate-missing-build-notes=yes
787 @itemx --generate-missing-build-notes=no
788 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate GNU Build
789 attribute notes if none are present in the input sources.
790 The default can be controlled by the @option{--enable-generate-build-notes}
791 configure option.
792
793 @end ifset
794
795 @item --help
796 Print a summary of the command-line options and exit.
797
798 @item --target-help
799 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
800
801 @item -I @var{dir}
802 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
803
804 @item -J
805 Don't warn about signed overflow.
806
807 @item -K
808 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
809 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
810 @end ifclear
811 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
812 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
813 @end ifset
814
815 @item -L
816 @itemx --keep-locals
817 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
818 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
819 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
820 @ifclear man
821 @xref{Symbol Names}.
822 @end ifclear
823
824 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
825 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
826 listing to @var{number}.
827
828 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
829 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
830 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
831
832 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
833 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
834 @var{number} bytes.
835
836 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
837 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
838 to @var{number} + 1.
839
840 @item --no-pad-sections
841 Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
842 of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
843 which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
844
845 @item -o @var{objfile}
846 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
847
848 @item -R
849 Fold the data section into the text section.
850
851 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
852 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
853 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
854 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
855 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
856 requirements at the expense of speed.
857
858 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
859 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
860 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
861 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
862
863 @ifset ELF
864 @item --sectname-subst
865 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
866 @ifclear man
867 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
868 @end ifclear
869 @end ifset
870
871 @item --statistics
872 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
873 assembly.
874
875 @item --strip-local-absolute
876 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
877
878 @item -v
879 @itemx -version
880 Print the @command{as} version.
881
882 @item --version
883 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
884
885 @item -W
886 @itemx --no-warn
887 Suppress warning messages.
888
889 @item --fatal-warnings
890 Treat warnings as errors.
891
892 @item --warn
893 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
894
895 @item -w
896 Ignored.
897
898 @item -x
899 Ignored.
900
901 @item -Z
902 Generate an object file even after errors.
903
904 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
905 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
906
907 @end table
908 @c man end
909
910 @ifset AARCH64
911
912 @ifclear man
913 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
914 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
915 @end ifclear
916
917 @ifset man
918 @c man begin OPTIONS
919 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
920 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
921 @c man end
922 @c man begin INCLUDE
923 @include c-aarch64.texi
924 @c ended inside the included file
925 @end ifset
926
927 @end ifset
928
929 @ifset ALPHA
930
931 @ifclear man
932 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
933 for an Alpha processor.
934 @end ifclear
935
936 @ifset man
937 @c man begin OPTIONS
938 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
939 processor.
940 @c man end
941 @c man begin INCLUDE
942 @include c-alpha.texi
943 @c ended inside the included file
944 @end ifset
945
946 @end ifset
947
948 @c man begin OPTIONS
949 @ifset ARC
950 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
951 processor.
952
953 @table @gcctabopt
954 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
955 This option selects the core processor variant.
956 @item -EB | -EL
957 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
958 @item -mcode-density
959 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
960 @end table
961 @end ifset
962
963 @ifset ARM
964 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
965 processor family.
966
967 @table @gcctabopt
968 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
969 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
970 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
971 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
972 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
973 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
974 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
975 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
976 @item -mthumb
977 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
978 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
979 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
980 @item -EB | -EL
981 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
982 @item -mthumb-interwork
983 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
984 ARM code in mind.
985 @item -mccs
986 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
987 @item -k
988 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
989 @end table
990 @end ifset
991 @c man end
992
993 @ifset Blackfin
994
995 @ifclear man
996 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
997 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
998 @end ifclear
999
1000 @ifset man
1001 @c man begin OPTIONS
1002 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1003 the Blackfin processor family.
1004 @c man end
1005 @c man begin INCLUDE
1006 @include c-bfin.texi
1007 @c ended inside the included file
1008 @end ifset
1009
1010 @end ifset
1011
1012 @ifset BPF
1013
1014 @ifclear man
1015 @xref{BPF Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1016 configured for the Linux kernel BPF processor family.
1017 @end ifclear
1018
1019 @ifset man
1020 @c man begin OPTIONS
1021 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1022 the Linux kernel BPF processor family.
1023 @c man end
1024 @c man begin INCLUDE
1025 @include c-bpf.texi
1026 @c ended inside the included file
1027 @end ifset
1028
1029 @end ifset
1030
1031 @c man begin OPTIONS
1032 @ifset CRIS
1033 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
1034 @end ifset
1035
1036 @ifset CSKY
1037
1038 @ifclear man
1039 @xref{C-SKY Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1040 configured for the C-SKY processor family.
1041 @end ifclear
1042
1043 @ifset man
1044 @c man begin OPTIONS
1045 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1046 the C-SKY processor family.
1047 @c man end
1048 @c man begin INCLUDE
1049 @include c-csky.texi
1050 @c ended inside the included file
1051 @end ifset
1052
1053 @end ifset
1054
1055 @ifset D10V
1056 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1057 a D10V processor.
1058 @table @gcctabopt
1059 @cindex D10V optimization
1060 @cindex optimization, D10V
1061 @item -O
1062 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
1063 @end table
1064 @end ifset
1065
1066 @ifset D30V
1067 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
1068 processor.
1069 @table @gcctabopt
1070 @cindex D30V optimization
1071 @cindex optimization, D30V
1072 @item -O
1073 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
1074
1075 @cindex D30V nops
1076 @item -n
1077 Warn when nops are generated.
1078
1079 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
1080 @item -N
1081 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
1082 @end table
1083 @end ifset
1084 @c man end
1085
1086 @ifset EPIPHANY
1087 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1088 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
1089
1090 @ifclear man
1091 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1092 configured for an Epiphany processor.
1093 @end ifclear
1094
1095 @ifset man
1096 @c man begin OPTIONS
1097 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1098 an Epiphany processor.
1099 @c man end
1100 @c man begin INCLUDE
1101 @include c-epiphany.texi
1102 @c ended inside the included file
1103 @end ifset
1104
1105 @end ifset
1106
1107 @ifset H8300
1108
1109 @ifclear man
1110 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1111 for an H8/300 processor.
1112 @end ifclear
1113
1114 @ifset man
1115 @c man begin OPTIONS
1116 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1117 processor.
1118 @c man end
1119 @c man begin INCLUDE
1120 @include c-h8300.texi
1121 @c ended inside the included file
1122 @end ifset
1123
1124 @end ifset
1125
1126 @ifset I80386
1127
1128 @ifclear man
1129 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1130 configured for an i386 processor.
1131 @end ifclear
1132
1133 @ifset man
1134 @c man begin OPTIONS
1135 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1136 an i386 processor.
1137 @c man end
1138 @c man begin INCLUDE
1139 @include c-i386.texi
1140 @c ended inside the included file
1141 @end ifset
1142
1143 @end ifset
1144
1145 @c man begin OPTIONS
1146 @ifset IP2K
1147 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1148 Ubicom IP2K series.
1149
1150 @table @gcctabopt
1151
1152 @item -mip2022ext
1153 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1154
1155 @item -mip2022
1156 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1157 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1158
1159 @end table
1160 @end ifset
1161
1162 @ifset M32C
1163 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1164 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1165
1166 @table @gcctabopt
1167
1168 @item -m32c
1169 Assemble M32C instructions.
1170
1171 @item -m16c
1172 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1173
1174 @item -relax
1175 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1176
1177 @item -h-tick-hex
1178 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1179
1180 @end table
1181 @end ifset
1182
1183 @ifset M32R
1184 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1185 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1186
1187 @table @gcctabopt
1188
1189 @item --m32rx
1190 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1191 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1192
1193 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1194 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1195 encountered.
1196
1197 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1198 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1199 encountered.
1200
1201 @end table
1202 @end ifset
1203
1204 @ifset M680X0
1205 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1206 Motorola 68000 series.
1207
1208 @table @gcctabopt
1209
1210 @item -l
1211 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1212
1213 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1214 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1215 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1216 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1217 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1218
1219 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1220 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1221 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1222 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1223 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1224 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1225
1226 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1227 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1228 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1229
1230 @end table
1231 @end ifset
1232
1233 @ifset NIOSII
1234
1235 @ifclear man
1236 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1237 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1238 @end ifclear
1239
1240 @ifset man
1241 @c man begin OPTIONS
1242 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1243 Altera Nios II processor.
1244 @c man end
1245 @c man begin INCLUDE
1246 @include c-nios2.texi
1247 @c ended inside the included file
1248 @end ifset
1249 @end ifset
1250
1251 @ifset PDP11
1252
1253 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1254 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1255
1256 @table @gcctabopt
1257 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1258 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1259 default is @option{-mpic}.
1260
1261 @item -mall
1262 @itemx -mall-extensions
1263 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1264
1265 @item -mno-extensions
1266 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1267
1268 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1269 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1270
1271 @item -m@var{cpu}
1272 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1273 disable all other extensions.
1274
1275 @item -m@var{machine}
1276 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1277 model, and disable all other extensions.
1278 @end table
1279
1280 @end ifset
1281
1282 @ifset PJ
1283 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1284 a picoJava processor.
1285
1286 @table @gcctabopt
1287
1288 @cindex PJ endianness
1289 @cindex endianness, PJ
1290 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1291 @item -mb
1292 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1293
1294 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1295 @item -ml
1296 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1297
1298 @end table
1299 @end ifset
1300
1301 @ifset PRU
1302
1303 @ifclear man
1304 @xref{PRU Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1305 for a PRU processor.
1306 @end ifclear
1307
1308 @ifset man
1309 @c man begin OPTIONS
1310 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1311 PRU processor.
1312 @c man end
1313 @c man begin INCLUDE
1314 @include c-pru.texi
1315 @c ended inside the included file
1316 @end ifset
1317 @end ifset
1318
1319 @ifset M68HC11
1320 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1321 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1322
1323 @table @gcctabopt
1324
1325 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1326 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1327 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1328
1329 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1330 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1331 XGATE address space.
1332
1333 @item -mshort
1334 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1335
1336 @item -mlong
1337 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1338
1339 @item -mshort-double
1340 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1341
1342 @item -mlong-double
1343 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1344
1345 @item --force-long-branches
1346 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1347 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1348 sub routine.
1349
1350 @item -S | --short-branches
1351 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1352 when the offset is out of range.
1353
1354 @item --strict-direct-mode
1355 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1356 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1357
1358 @item --print-insn-syntax
1359 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1360
1361 @item --print-opcodes
1362 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1363
1364 @item --generate-example
1365 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1366 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1367
1368 @end table
1369 @end ifset
1370
1371 @ifset SPARC
1372 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1373 for the SPARC architecture:
1374
1375 @table @gcctabopt
1376 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1377 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1378 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1379
1380 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1381 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1382
1383 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1384 UltraSPARC extensions.
1385
1386 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1387 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1388 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1389
1390 @item -bump
1391 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1392 @end table
1393 @end ifset
1394
1395 @ifset TIC54X
1396 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1397 architecture.
1398
1399 @table @gcctabopt
1400 @item -mfar-mode
1401 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1402 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1403 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1404 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1405 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1406 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1407 behaviour in the shell.
1408 @end table
1409 @end ifset
1410
1411 @ifset MIPS
1412 @c man begin OPTIONS
1413 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1414 a MIPS processor.
1415
1416 @table @gcctabopt
1417 @item -G @var{num}
1418 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1419 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1420 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1421
1422 @cindex MIPS endianness
1423 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1424 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1425 @item -EB
1426 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1427
1428 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1429 @item -EL
1430 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1431
1432 @cindex MIPS ISA
1433 @item -mips1
1434 @itemx -mips2
1435 @itemx -mips3
1436 @itemx -mips4
1437 @itemx -mips5
1438 @itemx -mips32
1439 @itemx -mips32r2
1440 @itemx -mips32r3
1441 @itemx -mips32r5
1442 @itemx -mips32r6
1443 @itemx -mips64
1444 @itemx -mips64r2
1445 @itemx -mips64r3
1446 @itemx -mips64r5
1447 @itemx -mips64r6
1448 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1449 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1450 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1451 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1452 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1453 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1454 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1455 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1456 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1457 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1458
1459 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1460 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1461
1462 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1463 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1464
1465 @item -mfix7000
1466 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1467 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1468 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1469
1470 @item -mfix-rm7000
1471 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1472 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1473 followed by a load instruction.
1474
1475 @item -mfix-r5900
1476 @itemx -mno-fix-r5900
1477 Do not attempt to schedule the preceding instruction into the delay slot
1478 of a branch instruction placed at the end of a short loop of six
1479 instructions or fewer and always schedule a @code{nop} instruction there
1480 instead. The short loop bug under certain conditions causes loops to
1481 execute only once or twice, due to a hardware bug in the R5900 chip.
1482
1483 @item -mdebug
1484 @itemx -no-mdebug
1485 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1486 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1487
1488 @item -mpdr
1489 @itemx -mno-pdr
1490 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1491
1492 @item -mgp32
1493 @itemx -mfp32
1494 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1495 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1496 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1497 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1498
1499 @item -mgp64
1500 @itemx -mfp64
1501 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1502 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1503 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1504 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1505
1506 @item -mfpxx
1507 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1508 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1509 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1510 32 or 64 bits wide.
1511
1512 @item -modd-spreg
1513 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1514 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1515 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1516 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1517
1518 @item -mips16
1519 @itemx -no-mips16
1520 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1521 @code{.module mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1522 turns off this option.
1523
1524 @item -mmips16e2
1525 @itemx -mno-mips16e2
1526 Enable the use of MIPS16e2 instructions in MIPS16 mode. This is equivalent
1527 to putting @code{.module mips16e2} at the start of the assembly file.
1528 @samp{-mno-mips16e2} turns off this option.
1529
1530 @item -mmicromips
1531 @itemx -mno-micromips
1532 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1533 @code{.module micromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1534 @samp{-mno-micromips} turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting
1535 @code{.module nomicromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1536
1537 @item -msmartmips
1538 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1539 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1540 equivalent to putting @code{.module smartmips} at the start of the assembly
1541 file. @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1542
1543 @item -mips3d
1544 @itemx -no-mips3d
1545 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1546 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1547 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1548
1549 @item -mdmx
1550 @itemx -no-mdmx
1551 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1552 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1553 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1554
1555 @item -mdsp
1556 @itemx -mno-dsp
1557 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1558 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1559 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1560
1561 @item -mdspr2
1562 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1563 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1564 This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1565 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1566 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1567
1568 @item -mdspr3
1569 @itemx -mno-dspr3
1570 Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1571 This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1572 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1573 @samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1574
1575 @item -mmsa
1576 @itemx -mno-msa
1577 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1578 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1579 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1580
1581 @item -mxpa
1582 @itemx -mno-xpa
1583 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1584 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1585 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1586
1587 @item -mmt
1588 @itemx -mno-mt
1589 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1590 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1591 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1592
1593 @item -mmcu
1594 @itemx -mno-mcu
1595 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1596 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1597 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1598
1599 @item -mcrc
1600 @itemx -mno-crc
1601 Generate code for the MIPS cyclic redundancy check (CRC) Application
1602 Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept CRC instructions.
1603 @samp{-mno-crc} turns off this option.
1604
1605 @item -mginv
1606 @itemx -mno-ginv
1607 Generate code for the Global INValidate (GINV) Application Specific
1608 Extension. This tells the assembler to accept GINV instructions.
1609 @samp{-mno-ginv} turns off this option.
1610
1611 @item -mloongson-mmi
1612 @itemx -mno-loongson-mmi
1613 Generate code for the Loongson MultiMedia extensions Instructions (MMI)
1614 Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MMI
1615 instructions.
1616 @samp{-mno-loongson-mmi} turns off this option.
1617
1618 @item -mloongson-cam
1619 @itemx -mno-loongson-cam
1620 Generate code for the Loongson Content Address Memory (CAM) instructions.
1621 This tells the assembler to accept Loongson CAM instructions.
1622 @samp{-mno-loongson-cam} turns off this option.
1623
1624 @item -mloongson-ext
1625 @itemx -mno-loongson-ext
1626 Generate code for the Loongson EXTensions (EXT) instructions.
1627 This tells the assembler to accept Loongson EXT instructions.
1628 @samp{-mno-loongson-ext} turns off this option.
1629
1630 @item -mloongson-ext2
1631 @itemx -mno-loongson-ext2
1632 Generate code for the Loongson EXTensions R2 (EXT2) instructions.
1633 This option implies @samp{-mloongson-ext}.
1634 This tells the assembler to accept Loongson EXT2 instructions.
1635 @samp{-mno-loongson-ext2} turns off this option.
1636
1637 @item -minsn32
1638 @itemx -mno-insn32
1639 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1640 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1641 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1642 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1643 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1644 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1645 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1646
1647 @item --construct-floats
1648 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1649 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1650 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1651 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1652 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1653 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1654
1655 @item --relax-branch
1656 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1657 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1658 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1659 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1660
1661 @item -mignore-branch-isa
1662 @itemx -mno-ignore-branch-isa
1663 Ignore branch checks for invalid transitions between ISA modes. The
1664 semantics of branches does not provide for an ISA mode switch, so in
1665 most cases the ISA mode a branch has been encoded for has to be the
1666 same as the ISA mode of the branch's target label. Therefore GAS has
1667 checks implemented that verify in branch assembly that the two ISA
1668 modes match. @samp{-mignore-branch-isa} disables these checks. By
1669 default @samp{-mno-ignore-branch-isa} is selected, causing any invalid
1670 branch requiring a transition between ISA modes to produce an error.
1671
1672 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1673 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1674 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1675
1676 @cindex emulation
1677 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1678 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1679 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1680 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1681 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1682
1683 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1684 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1685 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1686 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1687 preferred options instead.
1688
1689 @item -nocpp
1690 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1691 the native tools.
1692
1693 @item --trap
1694 @itemx --no-trap
1695 @itemx --break
1696 @itemx --no-break
1697 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1698 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1699 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1700 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1701 break exception.
1702
1703 @item -n
1704 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1705 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1706 @end table
1707 @c man end
1708 @end ifset
1709
1710 @ifset MCORE
1711 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1712 an MCore processor.
1713
1714 @table @gcctabopt
1715 @item -jsri2bsr
1716 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1717 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1718 The command-line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1719
1720 @item -sifilter
1721 @itemx -nosifilter
1722 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1723 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command-line option.
1724
1725 @item -relax
1726 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1727
1728 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1729 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1730 can be assembled.
1731
1732 @item -EB
1733 Assemble for a big endian target.
1734
1735 @item -EL
1736 Assemble for a little endian target.
1737
1738 @end table
1739 @end ifset
1740 @c man end
1741
1742 @ifset METAG
1743
1744 @ifclear man
1745 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1746 for a Meta processor.
1747 @end ifclear
1748
1749 @ifset man
1750 @c man begin OPTIONS
1751 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1752 Meta processor.
1753 @c man end
1754 @c man begin INCLUDE
1755 @include c-metag.texi
1756 @c ended inside the included file
1757 @end ifset
1758
1759 @end ifset
1760
1761 @c man begin OPTIONS
1762 @ifset MMIX
1763 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1764 @end ifset
1765
1766 @ifset NDS32
1767
1768 @ifclear man
1769 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1770 for a NDS32 processor.
1771 @end ifclear
1772 @c ended inside the included file
1773 @end ifset
1774
1775 @ifset man
1776 @c man begin OPTIONS
1777 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1778 NDS32 processor.
1779 @c man end
1780 @c man begin INCLUDE
1781 @include c-nds32.texi
1782 @c ended inside the included file
1783 @end ifset
1784
1785 @c man end
1786 @ifset PPC
1787
1788 @ifclear man
1789 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1790 for a PowerPC processor.
1791 @end ifclear
1792
1793 @ifset man
1794 @c man begin OPTIONS
1795 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1796 PowerPC processor.
1797 @c man end
1798 @c man begin INCLUDE
1799 @include c-ppc.texi
1800 @c ended inside the included file
1801 @end ifset
1802
1803 @end ifset
1804
1805 @ifset RISCV
1806
1807 @ifclear man
1808 @xref{RISC-V-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1809 for a RISC-V processor.
1810 @end ifclear
1811
1812 @ifset man
1813 @c man begin OPTIONS
1814 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1815 RISC-V processor.
1816 @c man end
1817 @c man begin INCLUDE
1818 @include c-riscv.texi
1819 @c ended inside the included file
1820 @end ifset
1821
1822 @end ifset
1823
1824 @c man begin OPTIONS
1825 @ifset RX
1826 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1827 @end ifset
1828
1829 @ifset S390
1830 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1831 processor family.
1832
1833 @table @gcctabopt
1834 @item -m31
1835 @itemx -m64
1836 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1837 @item -mesa
1838 @item -mzarch
1839 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1840 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1841 @item -march=@var{processor}
1842 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
1843 @samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
1844 @samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
1845 @samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
1846 @samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}), @samp{z14} (or @samp{arch12}), or @samp{z15}
1847 (or @samp{arch13}).
1848 @item -mregnames
1849 @itemx -mno-regnames
1850 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1851 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1852 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1853 but evaluates to zero.
1854 @end table
1855 @end ifset
1856 @c man end
1857
1858 @ifset TIC6X
1859
1860 @ifclear man
1861 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1862 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1863 @end ifclear
1864
1865 @ifset man
1866 @c man begin OPTIONS
1867 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1868 TMS320C6000 processor.
1869 @c man end
1870 @c man begin INCLUDE
1871 @include c-tic6x.texi
1872 @c ended inside the included file
1873 @end ifset
1874
1875 @end ifset
1876
1877 @ifset TILEGX
1878
1879 @ifclear man
1880 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1881 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1882 @end ifclear
1883
1884 @ifset man
1885 @c man begin OPTIONS
1886 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1887 processor.
1888 @c man end
1889 @c man begin INCLUDE
1890 @include c-tilegx.texi
1891 @c ended inside the included file
1892 @end ifset
1893
1894 @end ifset
1895
1896 @ifset VISIUM
1897
1898 @ifclear man
1899 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1900 for a Visium processor.
1901 @end ifclear
1902
1903 @ifset man
1904 @c man begin OPTIONS
1905 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1906 processor.
1907 @c man end
1908 @c man begin INCLUDE
1909 @include c-visium.texi
1910 @c ended inside the included file
1911 @end ifset
1912
1913 @end ifset
1914
1915 @ifset XTENSA
1916
1917 @ifclear man
1918 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1919 for an Xtensa processor.
1920 @end ifclear
1921
1922 @ifset man
1923 @c man begin OPTIONS
1924 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1925 Xtensa processor.
1926 @c man end
1927 @c man begin INCLUDE
1928 @include c-xtensa.texi
1929 @c ended inside the included file
1930 @end ifset
1931
1932 @end ifset
1933
1934 @c man begin OPTIONS
1935
1936 @ifset Z80
1937 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1938 a Z80 family processor.
1939 @table @gcctabopt
1940 @item -z80
1941 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1942 @item -r800
1943 Assemble for R800 processor.
1944 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1945 @itemx -Wnud
1946 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1947 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1948 @itemx -Wnup
1949 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1950 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1951 @itemx -Wud
1952 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1953 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1954 @itemx -Wup
1955 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1956 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1957 @itemx -Fud
1958 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1959 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1960 @itemx -Fup
1961 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1962 @end table
1963 @end ifset
1964
1965 @c man end
1966
1967 @menu
1968 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1969 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1970 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1971 * Command Line:: Command Line
1972 * Input Files:: Input Files
1973 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1974 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1975 @end menu
1976
1977 @node Manual
1978 @section Structure of this Manual
1979
1980 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1981 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1982 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1983 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1984 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1985
1986 @ifclear GENERIC
1987 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1988 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1989 @end ifclear
1990 @ifset GENERIC
1991 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1992 various flavors of the assembler.
1993 @end ifset
1994
1995 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1996 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1997 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1998 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1999 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
2000 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
2001 particular architecture.
2002 @ifset GENERIC
2003 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
2004 machine architecture manual for this information.
2005 @end ifset
2006 @ifclear GENERIC
2007 @ifset H8/300
2008 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
2009 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
2010 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
2011 @end ifset
2012 @ifset SH
2013 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
2014 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
2015 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
2016 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
2017 @end ifset
2018 @ifset Z8000
2019 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
2020 @end ifset
2021 @end ifclear
2022
2023 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
2024 @ignore
2025 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
2026 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
2027 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
2028 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
2029 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
2030 qualification.
2031
2032 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
2033 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
2034 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
2035 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
2036 @end ignore
2037
2038 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
2039 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
2040 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
2041 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
2042 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
2043 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
2044 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
2045 @c directives).
2046
2047 @node GNU Assembler
2048 @section The GNU Assembler
2049
2050 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2051
2052 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
2053 @ifclear GENERIC
2054 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
2055 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
2056 @end ifclear
2057 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
2058 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
2059 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
2060 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
2061 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
2062
2063 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
2064 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
2065 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
2066 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
2067 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
2068 machine would assemble.
2069 @ifset VAX
2070 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
2071 @end ifset
2072 @ifset M680X0
2073 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
2074 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
2075 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
2076 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
2077 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
2078 @end ifset
2079
2080 @c man end
2081
2082 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
2083 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
2084 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
2085
2086 @node Object Formats
2087 @section Object File Formats
2088
2089 @cindex object file format
2090 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
2091 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
2092 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
2093 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
2094 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
2095 @ifclear GENERIC
2096 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
2097 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
2098 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
2099 @end ifclear
2100 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
2101 @ifset HPPA
2102 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
2103 SOM or ELF format object files.
2104 @end ifset
2105 @end ifclear
2106
2107 @node Command Line
2108 @section Command Line
2109
2110 @cindex command line conventions
2111
2112 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
2113 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
2114 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
2115 significant.
2116
2117 @cindex standard input, as input file
2118 @kindex --
2119 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
2120 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
2121
2122 @cindex options, command line
2123 Except for @samp{--} any command-line argument that begins with a
2124 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
2125 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
2126 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
2127 the letter is important. All options are optional.
2128
2129 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
2130 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
2131 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
2132 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
2133
2134 @smallexample
2135 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
2136 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
2137 @end smallexample
2138
2139 @node Input Files
2140 @section Input Files
2141
2142 @cindex input
2143 @cindex source program
2144 @cindex files, input
2145 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
2146 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
2147 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
2148 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
2149
2150 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
2151 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
2152 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
2153 order specified.
2154
2155 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2156 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
2157 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
2158 (The standard input is also a file.)
2159
2160 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
2161 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
2162 command-line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
2163 is taken to be an input file name.
2164
2165 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
2166 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
2167 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
2168 to assemble.
2169
2170 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
2171 in your command line.
2172
2173 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
2174 file.
2175
2176 @c man end
2177
2178 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
2179
2180 @cindex input file linenumbers
2181 @cindex line numbers, in input files
2182 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
2183 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
2184 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2185 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2186
2187 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2188 to @command{@value{AS}}.
2189
2190 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2191 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
2192 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2193 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2194 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
2195 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2196
2197 @node Object
2198 @section Output (Object) File
2199
2200 @cindex object file
2201 @cindex output file
2202 @kindex a.out
2203 @kindex .o
2204 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2205 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
2206 is the object file. Its default name is @code{a.out}.
2207 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2208 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2209 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2210 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2211 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2212
2213 @cindex linker
2214 @kindex ld
2215 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2216 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2217 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2218 information for the debugger.
2219
2220 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2221 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2222
2223 @node Errors
2224 @section Error and Warning Messages
2225
2226 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2227
2228 @cindex error messages
2229 @cindex warning messages
2230 @cindex messages from assembler
2231 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2232 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2233 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2234 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2235 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2236
2237 @c man end
2238
2239 @cindex format of warning messages
2240 Warning messages have the format
2241
2242 @smallexample
2243 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2244 @end smallexample
2245
2246 @noindent
2247 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2248 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2249 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2250 @ifset GENERIC
2251 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2252 @end ifset
2253 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2254 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2255 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2256
2257 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2258 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2259
2260 @smallexample
2261 .file 2 "bar.c"
2262 error_assembler_source
2263 .file "foo.c"
2264 .line 30
2265 error_c_source
2266 @end smallexample
2267
2268 produces this output:
2269
2270 @smallexample
2271 Assembler messages:
2272 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2273 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2274 @end smallexample
2275
2276 @cindex format of error messages
2277 Error messages have the format
2278
2279 @smallexample
2280 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2281 @end smallexample
2282
2283 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2284 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2285 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2286
2287 @node Invoking
2288 @chapter Command-Line Options
2289
2290 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2291 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2292 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2293 for options specific
2294 @ifclear GENERIC
2295 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2296 @end ifclear
2297 @ifset GENERIC
2298 to particular machine architectures.
2299 @end ifset
2300
2301 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2302
2303 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2304 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2305 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2306 by commas. For example:
2307
2308 @smallexample
2309 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2310 @end smallexample
2311
2312 @noindent
2313 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2314 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2315 local symbols in the symbol table).
2316
2317 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2318 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2319 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2320 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2321 assembler.)
2322
2323 @c man end
2324
2325 @menu
2326 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2327 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2328 * D:: -D for compatibility
2329 * f:: -f to work faster
2330 * I:: -I for .include search path
2331 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2332 * K:: -K for compatibility
2333 @end ifclear
2334 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2335 * K:: -K for difference tables
2336 @end ifset
2337
2338 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2339 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2340 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2341 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2342 * no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2343 * o:: -o to name the object file
2344 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2345 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2346 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2347 * v:: -v to announce version
2348 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2349 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2350 @end menu
2351
2352 @node a
2353 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2354
2355 @kindex -a
2356 @kindex -ac
2357 @kindex -ad
2358 @kindex -ag
2359 @kindex -ah
2360 @kindex -al
2361 @kindex -an
2362 @kindex -as
2363 @cindex listings, enabling
2364 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2365
2366 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2367 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2368 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2369 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2370 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2371 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2372 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2373 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2374 also.
2375
2376 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2377 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2378
2379 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2380 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2381 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2382 omitted from the listing.
2383
2384 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2385 listing.
2386
2387 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2388 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2389 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2390 @code{.sbttl}.
2391 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2392 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2393 listing-control directives have no effect.
2394
2395 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2396 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2397
2398 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2399 because it
2400 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command-line switch
2401 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2402 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2403 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2404 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2405
2406 @node alternate
2407 @section @option{--alternate}
2408
2409 @kindex --alternate
2410 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2411
2412 @node D
2413 @section @option{-D}
2414
2415 @kindex -D
2416 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2417 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2418 @command{@value{AS}}.
2419
2420 @node f
2421 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2422
2423 @kindex -f
2424 @cindex trusted compiler
2425 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2426 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2427 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2428 and comment preprocessing on
2429 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2430 ,Preprocessing}.
2431
2432 @quotation
2433 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2434 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2435 not work correctly.
2436 @end quotation
2437
2438 @node I
2439 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2440
2441 @kindex -I @var{path}
2442 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2443 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2444 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2445 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2446 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2447 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2448 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2449 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2450 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2451 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2452
2453 @node K
2454 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2455
2456 @kindex -K
2457 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2458 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2459 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2460 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2461 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2462 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2463 alteration on other platforms.
2464 @end ifclear
2465
2466 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2467 @cindex difference tables, warning
2468 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2469 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2470 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2471 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2472 is done.
2473 @end ifset
2474
2475 @node L
2476 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2477
2478 @kindex -L
2479 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2480 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2481 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2482 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2483 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2484 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2485 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2486 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2487
2488 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2489 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2490 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2491
2492 @node listing
2493 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2494
2495 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command-line switch
2496 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2497 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2498 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2499 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2500 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2501 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2502 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2503
2504 @table @gcctabopt
2505 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2506 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2507 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2508 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2509 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2510
2511 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2512 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2513 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2514 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2515 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2516 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2517 switch is used the default is to one.
2518
2519 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2520 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2521 @cindex Width of source line output
2522 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2523 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2524 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2525
2526 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2527 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2528 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2529 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2530 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2531 @end table
2532
2533 @node M
2534 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2535
2536 @kindex -M
2537 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2538 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2539 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2540 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} assembler from Microtec Research.
2541 The exact nature of the
2542 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2543 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2544 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2545 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2546
2547 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2548 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2549 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2550 individually. These are:
2551
2552 @itemize @bullet
2553 @item global symbols in common section
2554
2555 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2556 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2557 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2558 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2559 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2560
2561 @item complex relocations
2562
2563 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2564 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2565 are not support by other object file formats.
2566
2567 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2568
2569 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2570 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2571 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2572 script.
2573
2574 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2575
2576 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2577 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2578
2579 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2580
2581 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2582 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2583 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2584 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2585 assigned within a linker script.
2586 @end itemize
2587
2588 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2589 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2590 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2591
2592 @itemize @bullet
2593
2594 @item EBCDIC strings
2595
2596 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2597
2598 @item packed binary coded decimal
2599
2600 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2601 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2602
2603 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2604
2605 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2606
2607 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2608
2609 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2610
2611 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2612
2613 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2614 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2615 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2616 these options serve no purpose.
2617
2618 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2619
2620 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2621 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2622 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2623
2624 @item other @code{OPT} options
2625
2626 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2627 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2628
2629 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2630
2631 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2632 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2633
2634 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2635
2636 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2637
2638 @end itemize
2639
2640 @node MD
2641 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2642
2643 @kindex --MD
2644 @cindex dependency tracking
2645 @cindex make rules
2646
2647 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2648 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2649 dependencies of the main source file.
2650
2651 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2652
2653 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2654
2655 @node no-pad-sections
2656 @section Output Section Padding
2657 @kindex --no-pad-sections
2658 @cindex output section padding
2659 Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2660 alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2661 memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2662 disable this behaviour.
2663
2664 @node o
2665 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2666
2667 @kindex -o
2668 @cindex naming object file
2669 @cindex object file name
2670 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2671 default it has the name @file{a.out}.
2672 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2673 object file a different name.
2674
2675 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2676 existing file of the same name.
2677
2678 @node R
2679 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2680
2681 @kindex -R
2682 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2683 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2684 @cindex joining text and data sections
2685 @cindex merging text and data sections
2686 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2687 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2688 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2689 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2690 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2691 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2692
2693 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2694 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2695 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2696 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2697
2698 @ifset COFF-ELF
2699 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2700 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2701 @samp{.data}.
2702 @end ifset
2703
2704 @ifset HPPA
2705 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2706 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2707 @end ifset
2708
2709 @node statistics
2710 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2711
2712 @kindex --statistics
2713 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2714 @cindex time, total for assembly
2715 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2716 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2717 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2718 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2719 seconds).
2720
2721 @node traditional-format
2722 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2723
2724 @kindex --traditional-format
2725 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2726 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2727 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2728
2729 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2730 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2731
2732 @node v
2733 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2734
2735 @kindex -v
2736 @kindex -version
2737 @cindex assembler version
2738 @cindex version of assembler
2739 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2740 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2741 command line.
2742
2743 @node W
2744 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2745
2746 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2747 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2748 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2749 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2750
2751 @kindex -W
2752 @kindex --no-warn
2753 @cindex suppressing warnings
2754 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2755 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2756 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2757 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2758 are still reported.
2759
2760 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2761 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2762 @cindex warnings, causing error
2763 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2764 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2765
2766 @kindex --warn
2767 @cindex warnings, switching on
2768 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2769 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2770
2771 @node Z
2772 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2773 @cindex object file, after errors
2774 @cindex errors, continuing after
2775 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2776 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2777 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2778 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2779 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2780 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2781
2782 @node Syntax
2783 @chapter Syntax
2784
2785 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2786 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2787 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2788 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2789 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2790 @ifclear VAX
2791 assembler.
2792 @end ifclear
2793 @ifset VAX
2794 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2795 @end ifset
2796
2797 @menu
2798 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2799 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2800 * Comments:: Comments
2801 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2802 * Statements:: Statements
2803 * Constants:: Constants
2804 @end menu
2805
2806 @node Preprocessing
2807 @section Preprocessing
2808
2809 @cindex preprocessing
2810 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2811 @itemize @bullet
2812 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2813 @item
2814 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2815 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2816 a single space.
2817
2818 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2819 @item
2820 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2821 appropriate number of newlines.
2822
2823 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2824 @item
2825 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2826 @end itemize
2827
2828 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2829 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2830 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2831 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2832 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2833 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2834 Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}.
2835
2836 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2837 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2838 preprocessed.
2839
2840 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2841 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2842 @kindex #NO_APP
2843 @kindex #APP
2844 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2845 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2846 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2847 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2848 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2849 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2850 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2851 and whitespace.
2852
2853 @node Whitespace
2854 @section Whitespace
2855
2856 @cindex whitespace
2857 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2858 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2859 people to read. Unless within character constants
2860 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2861 as exactly one space.
2862
2863 @node Comments
2864 @section Comments
2865
2866 @cindex comments
2867 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2868 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2869
2870 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2871 This means you may not nest these comments.
2872
2873 @smallexample
2874 /*
2875 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2876 is to use this sort of comment.
2877 */
2878
2879 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2880 @end smallexample
2881
2882 @cindex line comment character
2883 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2884 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2885 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2886 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2887 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2888 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2889 upon command-line options that have been used. For more details see the
2890 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2891
2892 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2893 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2894 to specify logical line numbers:
2895
2896 @kindex #
2897 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2898 @cindex logical line numbers
2899 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2900 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2901 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2902 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2903 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2904
2905 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2906 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2907
2908 @smallexample
2909 # This is an ordinary comment.
2910 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2911 # This is logical line # 36.
2912 @end smallexample
2913 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2914 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2915
2916 @node Symbol Intro
2917 @section Symbols
2918
2919 @cindex characters used in symbols
2920 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2921 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2922 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2923 @samp{_.$}.
2924 @end ifclear
2925 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2926 @ifclear GENERIC
2927 @ifset H8
2928 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2929 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2930 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2931 symbol names.)
2932 @end ifset
2933 @end ifclear
2934 @end ifset
2935 @ifset GENERIC
2936 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2937 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2938 @end ifset
2939 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2940 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2941 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2942 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2943 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2944
2945 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2946 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2947 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2948 backslash @code{\} character.
2949 @cindex length of symbols
2950
2951 @node Statements
2952 @section Statements
2953
2954 @cindex statements, structure of
2955 @cindex line separator character
2956 @cindex statement separator character
2957
2958 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2959 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2960 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2961 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2962 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2963 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2964 exception: they do not end statements.
2965
2966 @cindex newline, required at file end
2967 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2968 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2969 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2970
2971 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2972
2973 @cindex instructions and directives
2974 @cindex directives and instructions
2975 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2976 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2977 @c 13feb91.
2978 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2979 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2980 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2981 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2982 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2983 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2984 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2985 @ifset GENERIC
2986 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2987 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2988 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2989 language.@refill
2990 @end ifset
2991
2992 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2993 @cindex label (@code{:})
2994 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2995 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2996 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2997
2998 @ifset HPPA
2999 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
3000 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
3001 only one label may be defined on each line.
3002 @end ifset
3003
3004 @smallexample
3005 label: .directive followed by something
3006 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
3007 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
3008 @end smallexample
3009
3010 @node Constants
3011 @section Constants
3012
3013 @cindex constants
3014 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
3015 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
3016 @smallexample
3017 @group
3018 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
3019 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
3020 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
3021 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
3022 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
3023 @end group
3024 @end smallexample
3025
3026 @menu
3027 * Characters:: Character Constants
3028 * Numbers:: Number Constants
3029 @end menu
3030
3031 @node Characters
3032 @subsection Character Constants
3033
3034 @cindex character constants
3035 @cindex constants, character
3036 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
3037 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
3038 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
3039 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
3040 used in arithmetic expressions.
3041
3042 @menu
3043 * Strings:: Strings
3044 * Chars:: Characters
3045 @end menu
3046
3047 @node Strings
3048 @subsubsection Strings
3049
3050 @cindex string constants
3051 @cindex constants, string
3052 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
3053 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
3054 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
3055 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
3056 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
3057 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
3058 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
3059 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
3060
3061 @cindex escape codes, character
3062 @cindex character escape codes
3063 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
3064 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
3065 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
3066 @c NOTE: \initial {\\}
3067 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
3068 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
3069 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
3070 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
3071 @table @kbd
3072 @c @item \a
3073 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
3074 @c
3075 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
3076 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
3077 @item \b
3078 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
3079
3080 @c @item \e
3081 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
3082 @c
3083 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
3084 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
3085 @item backslash-f
3086 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
3087
3088 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
3089 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
3090 @item \n
3091 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
3092
3093 @c @item \p
3094 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
3095 @c
3096 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
3097 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
3098 @item \r
3099 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
3100
3101 @c @item \s
3102 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
3103 @c other assemblers.
3104 @c
3105 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
3106 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
3107 @item \t
3108 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
3109
3110 @c @item \v
3111 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
3112 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3113 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
3114 @c
3115 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
3116 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
3117 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3118 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
3119 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
3120 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
3121
3122 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
3123 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
3124 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
3125 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
3126 lower case @code{x} works.
3127
3128 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
3129 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
3130 @item \\
3131 Represents one @samp{\} character.
3132
3133 @c @item \'
3134 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3135 @c This is needed in single character literals
3136 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3137 @c a @samp{'}.
3138 @c
3139 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3140 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3141 @item \"
3142 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
3143 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3144
3145 @item \ @var{anything-else}
3146 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3147 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
3148 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3149 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3150 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3151 code and warns you of the fact.
3152 @end table
3153
3154 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3155 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
3156 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3157 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3158 sequence.
3159
3160 @node Chars
3161 @subsubsection Characters
3162
3163 @cindex single character constant
3164 @cindex character, single
3165 @cindex constant, single character
3166 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed by
3167 that character. Some backslash escapes apply to characters, @code{\b},
3168 @code{\f}, @code{\n}, @code{\r}, @code{\t}, and @code{\"} with the same meaning
3169 as for strings, plus @code{\'} for a single quote. So if you want to write the
3170 character backslash, you must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes
3171 the second @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a grave
3172 accent. A newline
3173 @ifclear GENERIC
3174 @ifclear abnormal-separator
3175 (or semicolon @samp{;})
3176 @end ifclear
3177 @ifset abnormal-separator
3178 @ifset H8
3179 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3180 Renesas SH)
3181 @end ifset
3182 @end ifset
3183 @end ifclear
3184 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3185 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3186 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3187 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3188 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3189
3190 @node Numbers
3191 @subsection Number Constants
3192
3193 @cindex constants, number
3194 @cindex number constants
3195 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3196 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3197 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3198 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3199 are floating point numbers, described below.
3200
3201 @menu
3202 * Integers:: Integers
3203 * Bignums:: Bignums
3204 * Flonums:: Flonums
3205 @ifclear GENERIC
3206 @end ifclear
3207 @end menu
3208
3209 @node Integers
3210 @subsubsection Integers
3211 @cindex integers
3212 @cindex constants, integer
3213
3214 @cindex binary integers
3215 @cindex integers, binary
3216 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3217 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3218
3219 @cindex octal integers
3220 @cindex integers, octal
3221 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3222 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3223
3224 @cindex decimal integers
3225 @cindex integers, decimal
3226 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3227 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3228
3229 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3230 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3231 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3232 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3233
3234 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3235 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3236 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3237
3238 @node Bignums
3239 @subsubsection Bignums
3240
3241 @cindex bignums
3242 @cindex constants, bignum
3243 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3244 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3245 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3246 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3247
3248 @node Flonums
3249 @subsubsection Flonums
3250 @cindex flonums
3251 @cindex floating point numbers
3252 @cindex constants, floating point
3253
3254 @cindex precision, floating point
3255 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3256 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3257 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3258 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3259 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3260 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3261
3262 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3263 @itemize @bullet
3264 @item
3265 The digit @samp{0}.
3266 @ifset HPPA
3267 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3268 @end ifset
3269
3270 @item
3271 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3272 @ifset GENERIC
3273 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3274 @ignore
3275 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3276 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3277 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3278 @end ignore
3279
3280 On the H8/300 and Renesas / SuperH SH architectures, the letter must be
3281 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3282
3283 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3284 (in upper or lower case).
3285
3286 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3287 @end ifset
3288 @ifclear GENERIC
3289 @ifset ARC
3290 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3291 @end ifset
3292 @ifset H8
3293 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3294 @end ifset
3295 @ifset HPPA
3296 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3297 @end ifset
3298 @end ifclear
3299
3300 @item
3301 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3302
3303 @item
3304 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3305
3306 @item
3307 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3308 or more decimal digits.
3309
3310 @item
3311 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3312
3313 @itemize @bullet
3314 @item
3315 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3316 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3317 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3318 @item
3319 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3320 @item
3321 One or more decimal digits.
3322 @end itemize
3323
3324 @end itemize
3325
3326 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3327 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3328
3329 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3330 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3331 @command{@value{AS}}.
3332
3333 @node Sections
3334 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3335 @cindex sections
3336 @cindex relocation
3337
3338 @menu
3339 * Secs Background:: Background
3340 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3341 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3342 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3343 * bss:: bss Section
3344 @end menu
3345
3346 @node Secs Background
3347 @section Background
3348
3349 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3350 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3351 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3352
3353 @cindex linker, and assembler
3354 @cindex assembler, and linker
3355 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3356 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3357 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3358 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3359 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3360 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3361 sections.
3362
3363 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3364 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3365 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3366 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3367 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3368 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3369 the proper run-time addresses.
3370 @ifset H8
3371 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3372 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3373 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3374 @end ifset
3375
3376 @cindex standard assembler sections
3377 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3378 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3379 @dfn{bss} sections.
3380
3381 @ifset COFF-ELF
3382 @ifset GENERIC
3383 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3384 @end ifset
3385 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3386 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3387 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3388 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3389 @end ifset
3390
3391 @ifset HPPA
3392 @ifset GENERIC
3393 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3394 @end ifset
3395 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3396 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3397 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3398 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3399 assembler directives.
3400
3401 @ifset SOM
3402 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3403 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3404 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3405 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3406 @end ifset
3407 @end ifset
3408
3409 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3410 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3411
3412 @ifset HPPA
3413 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3414 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3415 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3416 @end ifset
3417
3418 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3419 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3420 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3421 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3422 file is mentioned:
3423 @itemize @bullet
3424 @item
3425 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3426 an address?
3427 @item
3428 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3429 @item
3430 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3431 @display
3432 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3433 @end display
3434 @item
3435 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3436 @end itemize
3437
3438 @cindex addresses, format of
3439 @cindex section-relative addressing
3440 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3441 @display
3442 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3443 @end display
3444 @noindent
3445 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3446 nature.
3447 @ifset SOM
3448 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3449 symbol-relative instead.)
3450 @end ifset
3451
3452 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3453 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3454
3455 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3456 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3457 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3458 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3459 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3460 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3461 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3462 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3463 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3464
3465 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3466 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3467 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3468 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3469 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3470 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3471 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3472
3473 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3474 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3475 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3476 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3477 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3478 data and bss sections.
3479
3480 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3481 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3482
3483 @node Ld Sections
3484 @section Linker Sections
3485 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3486
3487 @table @strong
3488
3489 @ifset COFF-ELF
3490 @cindex named sections
3491 @cindex sections, named
3492 @item named sections
3493 @end ifset
3494 @ifset aout
3495 @cindex text section
3496 @cindex data section
3497 @itemx text section
3498 @itemx data section
3499 @end ifset
3500 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3501 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3502 true of another.
3503 @c @ifset aout
3504 When the program is running, however, it is
3505 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3506 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3507 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3508 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3509 in the data section.
3510 @c @end ifset
3511
3512 @cindex bss section
3513 @item bss section
3514 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3515 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3516 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3517 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3518 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3519 those explicit zeros from object files.
3520
3521 @cindex absolute section
3522 @item absolute section
3523 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3524 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3525 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3526 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3527
3528 @cindex undefined section
3529 @item undefined section
3530 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3531 the preceding sections.
3532 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3533 @end table
3534
3535 @cindex relocation example
3536 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3537 @ifset COFF-ELF
3538 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3539 @end ifset
3540 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3541
3542 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3543 @ifnottex
3544 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3545 @smallexample
3546 +-----+----+--+
3547 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3548 +-----+----+--+
3549
3550 text data bss
3551 seg. seg. seg.
3552
3553 +---+---+---+
3554 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3555 +---+---+---+
3556
3557 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3558 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3559 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3560
3561 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3562 @end smallexample
3563 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3564 @end ifnottex
3565 @need 5000
3566 @tex
3567 \bigskip
3568 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3569 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3570 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3571
3572 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3573 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3574 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3575
3576 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3577 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3578 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3579 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3580 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3581
3582 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3583 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3584
3585 @end tex
3586 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3587
3588 @node As Sections
3589 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3590
3591 @cindex internal assembler sections
3592 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3593 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3594 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3595 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3596 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3597 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3598 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3599 section-relative address.
3600
3601 @table @b
3602 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3603 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3604 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3605 bug in the assembler.
3606
3607 @cindex expr (internal section)
3608 @item expr section
3609 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3610 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3611 it in the expr section.
3612 @c FIXME item debug
3613 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3614 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3615 @c FIXME item register
3616 @end table
3617
3618 @node Sub-Sections
3619 @section Sub-Sections
3620
3621 @cindex numbered subsections
3622 @cindex grouping data
3623 @ifset aout
3624 Assembled bytes
3625 @ifset COFF-ELF
3626 conventionally
3627 @end ifset
3628 fall into two sections: text and data.
3629 @end ifset
3630 You may have separate groups of
3631 @ifset GENERIC
3632 data in named sections
3633 @end ifset
3634 @ifclear GENERIC
3635 @ifclear aout
3636 data in named sections
3637 @end ifclear
3638 @ifset aout
3639 text or data
3640 @end ifset
3641 @end ifclear
3642 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3643 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3644 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3645 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3646 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3647 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3648 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3649 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3650 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3651 constants being output.
3652
3653 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3654 goes in subsection number zero.
3655
3656 @ifset GENERIC
3657 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3658 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3659 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3660 @end ifset
3661 @ifclear GENERIC
3662 @ifset H8
3663 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3664 boundary (two bytes).
3665 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3666 @end ifset
3667 @end ifclear
3668
3669 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3670 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3671 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3672 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3673 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3674 data subsections as a data section.
3675
3676 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3677 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3678 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3679 @ifset COFF
3680 @ifset GENERIC
3681 When generating COFF output, you
3682 @end ifset
3683 @ifclear GENERIC
3684 You
3685 @end ifclear
3686 can also use an extra subsection
3687 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3688 @var{expression}}.
3689 @end ifset
3690 @ifset ELF
3691 @ifset GENERIC
3692 When generating ELF output, you
3693 @end ifset
3694 @ifclear GENERIC
3695 You
3696 @end ifclear
3697 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3698 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3699 @end ifset
3700 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3701 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3702 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3703 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3704 @smallexample
3705 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3706 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3707 .text 1
3708 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3709 .data 0
3710 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3711 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3712 .text 0
3713 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3714 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3715 @end smallexample
3716
3717 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3718 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3719 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3720 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3721 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3722 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3723 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3724
3725 @node bss
3726 @section bss Section
3727
3728 @cindex bss section
3729 @cindex common variable storage
3730 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3731 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3732 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3733 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3734 section are zeroed bytes.
3735
3736 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3737 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3738
3739 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3740 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3741
3742 @ifset GENERIC
3743 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3744 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3745 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3746 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3747 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3748 @end ifset
3749
3750 @node Symbols
3751 @chapter Symbols
3752
3753 @cindex symbols
3754 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3755 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3756 to debug.
3757
3758 @quotation
3759 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3760 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3761 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3762 @end quotation
3763
3764 @menu
3765 * Labels:: Labels
3766 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3767 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3768 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3769 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3770 @end menu
3771
3772 @node Labels
3773 @section Labels
3774
3775 @cindex labels
3776 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3777 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3778 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3779 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3780 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3781 definitions.
3782
3783 @ifset HPPA
3784 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3785 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3786 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3787 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3788 @end ifset
3789
3790 @node Setting Symbols
3791 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3792
3793 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3794 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3795 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3796 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3797 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3798 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3799 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3800 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3801
3802 @ifset Blackfin
3803 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3804 @end ifset
3805
3806 @node Symbol Names
3807 @section Symbol Names
3808
3809 @cindex symbol names
3810 @cindex names, symbol
3811 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3812 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3813 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3814 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3815 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3816 particular target machine), and underscores.
3817 @end ifclear
3818 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3819 @ifset H8
3820 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3821 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3822 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3823 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3824 @end ifset
3825 @end ifset
3826
3827 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3828 than @code{Foo}.
3829
3830 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3831 Local Labels. See below.
3832
3833 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3834 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3835 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3836 currently supported.
3837
3838 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3839 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3840 in a program.
3841
3842 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3843
3844 @cindex local symbol names
3845 @cindex symbol names, local
3846 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3847 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3848 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3849 set of local label prefixes.
3850 @ifset HPPA
3851 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3852 @end ifset
3853
3854 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3855 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3856 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3857 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3858
3859 @subheading Local Labels
3860
3861 @cindex local labels
3862 @cindex temporary symbol names
3863 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3864 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3865 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3866 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3867 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3868 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3869 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3870 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3871 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3872 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3873
3874 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3875 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3876 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3877 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3878 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3879 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3880 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3881
3882 Here is an example:
3883
3884 @smallexample
3885 1: branch 1f
3886 2: branch 1b
3887 1: branch 2f
3888 2: branch 1b
3889 @end smallexample
3890
3891 Which is the equivalent of:
3892
3893 @smallexample
3894 label_1: branch label_3
3895 label_2: branch label_1
3896 label_3: branch label_4
3897 label_4: branch label_3
3898 @end smallexample
3899
3900 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3901 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3902 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3903 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3904 these parts:
3905
3906 @table @code
3907 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3908 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3909 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3910 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3911 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3912 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3913 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3914 you may use them in debugging.
3915
3916 @item @var{number}
3917 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3918 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3919
3920 @item @kbd{C-B}
3921 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3922 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3923
3924 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3925 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3926 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3927 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3928 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3929 @end table
3930
3931 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3932 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3933
3934 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3935 @cindex dollar local symbols
3936
3937 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3938 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3939 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3940 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3941 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3942 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3943
3944 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3945 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3946 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3947
3948 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3949 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3950 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3951 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3952
3953 @node Dot
3954 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3955
3956 @cindex dot (symbol)
3957 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3958 @cindex current address
3959 @cindex location counter
3960 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3961 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3962 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3963 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3964 directive.
3965 @ifclear no-space-dir
3966 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3967 @samp{.space 4}.
3968 @end ifclear
3969
3970 @node Symbol Attributes
3971 @section Symbol Attributes
3972
3973 @cindex symbol attributes
3974 @cindex attributes, symbol
3975 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3976 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3977 attributes.
3978 @ifset INTERNALS
3979 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3980 @end ifset
3981
3982 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3983 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3984 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3985 would want.
3986
3987 @menu
3988 * Symbol Value:: Value
3989 * Symbol Type:: Type
3990 @ifset aout
3991 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3992 @end ifset
3993 @ifset COFF
3994 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3995 @end ifset
3996 @ifset SOM
3997 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3998 @end ifset
3999 @end menu
4000
4001 @node Symbol Value
4002 @subsection Value
4003
4004 @cindex value of a symbol
4005 @cindex symbol value
4006 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
4007 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
4008 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
4009 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
4010 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
4011 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
4012 called absolute.
4013
4014 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
4015 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
4016 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
4017 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
4018 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
4019 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
4020 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
4021 allocated storage.
4022
4023 @node Symbol Type
4024 @subsection Type
4025
4026 @cindex type of a symbol
4027 @cindex symbol type
4028 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
4029 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
4030 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
4031 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
4032
4033 @ifset aout
4034 @node a.out Symbols
4035 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4036
4037 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4038 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4039
4040 @menu
4041 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
4042 * Symbol Other:: Other
4043 @end menu
4044
4045 @node Symbol Desc
4046 @subsubsection Descriptor
4047
4048 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
4049 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
4050 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
4051 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
4052 @command{@value{AS}}.
4053
4054 @node Symbol Other
4055 @subsubsection Other
4056
4057 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
4058 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
4059 @end ifset
4060
4061 @ifset COFF
4062 @node COFF Symbols
4063 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
4064
4065 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
4066 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
4067
4068 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
4069 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
4070 @code{.endef} directives.
4071
4072 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
4073
4074 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
4075 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
4076 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
4077
4078 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
4079
4080 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
4081 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
4082 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4083 table information for COFF.
4084 @end ifset
4085
4086 @ifset SOM
4087 @node SOM Symbols
4088 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4089
4090 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
4091 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4092
4093 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4094 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4095
4096 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4097 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4098 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4099 @end ifset
4100
4101 @node Expressions
4102 @chapter Expressions
4103
4104 @cindex expressions
4105 @cindex addresses
4106 @cindex numeric values
4107 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4108 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4109
4110 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4111 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4112 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4113 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4114 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4115 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4116
4117 @menu
4118 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4119 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4120 @end menu
4121
4122 @node Empty Exprs
4123 @section Empty Expressions
4124
4125 @cindex empty expressions
4126 @cindex expressions, empty
4127 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4128 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4129 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4130 is compatible with other assemblers.
4131
4132 @node Integer Exprs
4133 @section Integer Expressions
4134
4135 @cindex integer expressions
4136 @cindex expressions, integer
4137 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4138 by @emph{operators}.
4139
4140 @menu
4141 * Arguments:: Arguments
4142 * Operators:: Operators
4143 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4144 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4145 @end menu
4146
4147 @node Arguments
4148 @subsection Arguments
4149
4150 @cindex expression arguments
4151 @cindex arguments in expressions
4152 @cindex operands in expressions
4153 @cindex arithmetic operands
4154 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4155 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4156 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4157 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4158 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4159 instruction operands.
4160
4161 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4162 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4163 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4164 integer.
4165
4166 Numbers are usually integers.
4167
4168 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4169 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4170 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4171 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4172 assemblers.
4173
4174 @cindex subexpressions
4175 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4176 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4177 operator followed by an argument.
4178
4179 @node Operators
4180 @subsection Operators
4181
4182 @cindex operators, in expressions
4183 @cindex arithmetic functions
4184 @cindex functions, in expressions
4185 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4186 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4187 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4188 whitespace.
4189
4190 @node Prefix Ops
4191 @subsection Prefix Operator
4192
4193 @cindex prefix operators
4194 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4195 one argument, which must be absolute.
4196
4197 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4198 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4199 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4200 @tex
4201 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4202 @end tex
4203
4204 @table @code
4205 @item -
4206 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4207 @item ~
4208 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4209 @end table
4210
4211 @tex
4212 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4213 @end tex
4214
4215 @node Infix Ops
4216 @subsection Infix Operators
4217
4218 @cindex infix operators
4219 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4220 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4221 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4222 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4223 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4224
4225 @enumerate
4226 @cindex operator precedence
4227 @cindex precedence of operators
4228
4229 @item
4230 Highest Precedence
4231
4232 @table @code
4233 @item *
4234 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4235
4236 @item /
4237 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4238
4239 @item %
4240 @dfn{Remainder}.
4241
4242 @item <<
4243 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4244
4245 @item >>
4246 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4247 @end table
4248
4249 @item
4250 Intermediate precedence
4251
4252 @table @code
4253 @item |
4254
4255 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4256
4257 @item &
4258 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4259
4260 @item ^
4261 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4262
4263 @item !
4264 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4265 @end table
4266
4267 @item
4268 Low Precedence
4269
4270 @table @code
4271 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4272 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4273 @cindex arguments for addition
4274 @item +
4275 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4276 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4277 sections.
4278
4279 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4280 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4281 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4282 @item -
4283 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4284 result has the section of the left argument.
4285 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4286 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4287 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4288
4289 @cindex comparison expressions
4290 @cindex expressions, comparison
4291 @item ==
4292 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4293 @item <>
4294 @itemx !=
4295 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4296 @item <
4297 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4298 @item >
4299 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4300 @item >=
4301 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4302 @item <=
4303 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4304
4305 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4306 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4307 perform signed comparisons.
4308 @end table
4309
4310 @item Lowest Precedence
4311
4312 @table @code
4313 @item &&
4314 @dfn{Logical And}.
4315
4316 @item ||
4317 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4318
4319 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4320 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4321 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4322 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4323
4324 @end table
4325 @end enumerate
4326
4327 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4328 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4329
4330 @node Pseudo Ops
4331 @chapter Assembler Directives
4332
4333 @cindex directives, machine independent
4334 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4335 @cindex machine independent directives
4336 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4337 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4338 in lower case.
4339
4340 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4341 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4342 @ifset GENERIC
4343 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4344 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4345 @end ifset
4346 @ifclear GENERIC
4347 @ifset machine-directives
4348 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4349 @end ifset
4350 @end ifclear
4351
4352 @menu
4353 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4354 @ifset COFF
4355 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4356 @end ifset
4357
4358 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4359 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4360 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4361 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4362 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4363 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4364 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4365 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4366 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4367 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4368 * Dc:: @code{.dc[@var{size}] @var{expressions}}
4369 * Dcb:: @code{.dcb[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4370 * Ds:: @code{.ds[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4371 @ifset COFF
4372 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4373 @end ifset
4374 @ifset aout
4375 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4376 @end ifset
4377 @ifset COFF
4378 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4379 @end ifset
4380
4381 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4382 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4383 * Else:: @code{.else}
4384 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4385 * End:: @code{.end}
4386 @ifset COFF
4387 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4388 @end ifset
4389
4390 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4391 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4392 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4393 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4394 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4395 * Err:: @code{.err}
4396 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4397 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4398 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4399 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4400 * File:: @code{.file}
4401 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4402 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4403 * Func:: @code{.func}
4404 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4405 @ifset ELF
4406 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4407 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4408 @end ifset
4409
4410 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4411 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4412 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4413 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4414 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4415 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4416 @ifset ELF
4417 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4418 @end ifset
4419
4420 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4421 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4422 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4423 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4424 @ifclear no-line-dir
4425 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4426 @end ifclear
4427
4428 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4429 * List:: @code{.list}
4430 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4431 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4432 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4433 @ifset ELF
4434 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4435 @end ifset
4436
4437 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4438 @ignore
4439 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4440 @end ignore
4441
4442 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4443 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4444 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4445 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4446 * Nops:: @code{.nops @var{size}[, @var{control}]}
4447 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4448 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4449 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4450 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4451 @ifset ELF
4452 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4453 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4454 @end ifset
4455
4456 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4457 @ifset ELF
4458 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4459 @end ifset
4460
4461 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4462 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4463 @ifset ELF
4464 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4465 @end ifset
4466
4467 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4468 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4469 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4470 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4471 @ifset COFF
4472 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4473 @end ifset
4474 @ifset COFF-ELF
4475 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4476 @end ifset
4477
4478 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4479 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4480 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4481 @ifset COFF-ELF
4482 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4483 @end ifset
4484 @ifclear no-space-dir
4485 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
4486 @end ifclear
4487
4488 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4489 @ifclear no-space-dir
4490 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
4491 @end ifclear
4492 @ifset have-stabs
4493 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4494 @end ifset
4495
4496 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4497 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4498 @ifset ELF
4499 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4500 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4501 @end ifset
4502
4503 @ifset COFF
4504 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4505 @end ifset
4506
4507 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4508 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4509 @ifset COFF-ELF
4510 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4511 @end ifset
4512
4513 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4514 @ifset COFF
4515 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4516 @end ifset
4517
4518 @ifset ELF
4519 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4520 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4521 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4522 @end ifset
4523
4524 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4525 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4526 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4527 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4528 @ifclear no-space-dir
4529 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4530 @end ifclear
4531 @ifset ELF
4532 * 2byte:: @code{.2byte @var{expressions}}
4533 * 4byte:: @code{.4byte @var{expressions}}
4534 * 8byte:: @code{.8byte @var{bignums}}
4535 @end ifset
4536 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4537 @end menu
4538
4539 @node Abort
4540 @section @code{.abort}
4541
4542 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4543 @cindex stopping the assembly
4544 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4545 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4546 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4547 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4548 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4549
4550 @ifset COFF
4551 @node ABORT (COFF)
4552 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4553
4554 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4555 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4556 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4557
4558 @end ifset
4559
4560 @node Align
4561 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4562
4563 @cindex padding the location counter
4564 @cindex @code{align} directive
4565 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4566 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4567 required, as described below.
4568
4569 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4570 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4571 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
4572 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4573 with no-op instructions.
4574
4575 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4576 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4577 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4578 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4579 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4580 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4581 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4582
4583 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4584 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4585 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4586 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4587 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4588 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4589 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4590
4591 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4592 strongarm, it is the
4593 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4594 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4595 counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4596 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4597
4598 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4599 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4600 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4601 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4602 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4603
4604 @node Altmacro
4605 @section @code{.altmacro}
4606 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4607
4608 @ftable @code
4609 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4610 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4611 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4612 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4613 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4614 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4615 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4616
4617 @item String delimiters
4618 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4619 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4620
4621 @table @code
4622 @item '@var{string}'
4623 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4624
4625 @item <@var{string}>
4626 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4627 @end table
4628
4629 @item single-character string escape
4630 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4631 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4632 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4633 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4634
4635 @item Expression results as strings
4636 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4637 and use the result as a string.
4638 @end ftable
4639
4640 @node Ascii
4641 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4642
4643 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4644 @cindex string literals
4645 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4646 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4647 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4648
4649 @node Asciz
4650 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4651
4652 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4653 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4654 @cindex null-terminated strings
4655 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4656 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4657
4658 @node Balign
4659 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4660
4661 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4662 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4663 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4664 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4665 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4666 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4667 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4668
4669 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4670 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4671 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
4672 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4673 with no-op instructions.
4674
4675 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4676 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4677 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4678 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4679 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4680 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4681 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4682
4683 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4684 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4685 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4686 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4687 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4688 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4689 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4690 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4691 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4692 undefined.
4693
4694 @node Bundle directives
4695 @section Bundle directives
4696 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4697 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4698 @cindex bundle
4699 @cindex instruction bundle
4700 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4701 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4702 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4703 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4704 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4705 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4706 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4707
4708 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4709 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4710 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4711 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4712 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4713 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4714 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4715 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4716 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4717 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4718 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4719
4720 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4721 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4722 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4723 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4724 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4725 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4726 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4727 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4728 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4729
4730 @cindex bundle-locked
4731 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4732 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4733 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4734 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4735 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4736 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4737 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4738 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4739 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4740 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4741 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4742 bundle size.
4743
4744 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4745 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4746 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4747 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4748 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4749 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4750
4751 @node Byte
4752 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4753
4754 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4755 @cindex integers, one byte
4756 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4757 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4758
4759 @node CFI directives
4760 @section CFI directives
4761 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4762 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4763 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4764 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4765 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4766 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4767 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4768 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4769
4770 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4771 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4772
4773 Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4774 which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4775
4776 The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4777 arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI
4778 generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4779 redefine it will result in an error.
4780
4781 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4782 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4783 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4784 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4785 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4786 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4787
4788 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4789 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4790
4791 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4792 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4793 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4794 unwind entry previously opened by
4795 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4796
4797 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4798 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4799 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4800 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4801 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4802 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4803 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4804 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4805 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4806 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4807 no personality routine.
4808
4809 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4810 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4811 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4812 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4813 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4814 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4815
4816 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4817 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4818 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4819 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4820 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4821 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4822 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4823 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4824
4825 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4826 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4827 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4828 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4829 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4830 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4831 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4832
4833 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4834 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4835 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4836 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4837 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4838 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4839
4840 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4841 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4842 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4843 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4844 by a section directive.
4845
4846 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4847 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4848 @code{.p2align} directive.
4849
4850 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4851 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4852 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4853
4854 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4855 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4856 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4857 remains the same.
4858
4859 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4860 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4861 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4862 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4863 CFA address.
4864
4865 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4866 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4867 value that is added/subtracted from the previous offset.
4868
4869 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4870 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4871 CFA.
4872
4873 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4874 Previous value of @var{register} is CFA + @var{offset}.
4875
4876 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4877 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4878 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4879 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4880 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4881 code it's annotating.
4882
4883 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4884 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4885
4886 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4887 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4888 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4889 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4890
4891 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4892 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4893
4894 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4895 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4896 i.e. no restoration needed.
4897
4898 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4899 @code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4900 implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4901 places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have
4902 multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4903 flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4904 the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4905
4906 @smallexample
4907 je label
4908 popq %rbx
4909 .cfi_restore %rbx
4910 popq %r12
4911 .cfi_restore %r12
4912 popq %rbp
4913 .cfi_restore %rbp
4914 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4915 ret
4916 label:
4917 /* Do something else */
4918 @end smallexample
4919
4920 Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
4921 to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple
4922 @code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
4923 locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
4924 @code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
4925 we can write:
4926
4927 @smallexample
4928 je label
4929 popq %rbx
4930 .cfi_remember_state
4931 .cfi_restore %rbx
4932 popq %r12
4933 .cfi_restore %r12
4934 popq %rbp
4935 .cfi_restore %rbp
4936 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4937 ret
4938 label:
4939 .cfi_restore_state
4940 /* Do something else */
4941 @end smallexample
4942
4943 That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
4944 as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
4945 @code{.cfi} directives.
4946
4947 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4948 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4949 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4950
4951 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4952 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4953
4954 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4955 SPARC register window has been saved.
4956
4957 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4958 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4959 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4960 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4961
4962 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4963 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4964 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4965 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4966
4967 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4968 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4969 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4970 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4971 or another register.
4972
4973 @node Comm
4974 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4975
4976 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4977 @cindex symbol, common
4978 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4979 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4980 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4981 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4982 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4983 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4984 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4985 using the largest size.
4986
4987 @ifset COFF-ELF
4988 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4989 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4990 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4991 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4992 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4993 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4994 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4995 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4996 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4997 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4998 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4999 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
5000 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
5001 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
5002 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
5003 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
5004 @end ifset
5005
5006 @ifset HPPA
5007 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5008 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5009 @end ifset
5010
5011 @node Data
5012 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
5013 @cindex @code{data} directive
5014
5015 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
5016 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
5017 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
5018 to zero.
5019
5020 @node Dc
5021 @section @code{.dc[@var{size}] @var{expressions}}
5022 @cindex @code{dc} directive
5023
5024 The @code{.dc} directive expects zero or more @var{expressions} separated by
5025 commas. These expressions are evaluated and their values inserted into the
5026 current section. The size of the emitted value depends upon the suffix to the
5027 @code{.dc} directive:
5028
5029 @table @code
5030 @item @samp{.a}
5031 Emits N-bit values, where N is the size of an address on the target system.
5032 @item @samp{.b}
5033 Emits 8-bit values.
5034 @item @samp{.d}
5035 Emits double precision floating-point values.
5036 @item @samp{.l}
5037 Emits 32-bit values.
5038 @item @samp{.s}
5039 Emits single precision floating-point values.
5040 @item @samp{.w}
5041 Emits 16-bit values.
5042 Note - this is true even on targets where the @code{.word} directive would emit
5043 32-bit values.
5044 @item @samp{.x}
5045 Emits long double precision floating-point values.
5046 @end table
5047
5048 If no suffix is used then @samp{.w} is assumed.
5049
5050 The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating
5051 point values.
5052
5053 @node Dcb
5054 @section @code{.dcb[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
5055 @cindex @code{dcb} directive
5056 This directive emits @var{number} copies of @var{fill}, each of @var{size}
5057 bytes. Both @var{number} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the
5058 comma and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. The
5059 @var{size} suffix, if present, must be one of:
5060
5061 @table @code
5062 @item @samp{.b}
5063 Emits single byte values.
5064 @item @samp{.d}
5065 Emits double-precision floating point values.
5066 @item @samp{.l}
5067 Emits 4-byte values.
5068 @item @samp{.s}
5069 Emits single-precision floating point values.
5070 @item @samp{.w}
5071 Emits 2-byte values.
5072 @item @samp{.x}
5073 Emits long double-precision floating point values.
5074 @end table
5075
5076 If the @var{size} suffix is omitted then @samp{.w} is assumed.
5077
5078 The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating
5079 point values.
5080
5081 @node Ds
5082 @section @code{.ds[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
5083 @cindex @code{ds} directive
5084 This directive emits @var{number} copies of @var{fill}, each of @var{size}
5085 bytes. Both @var{number} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the
5086 comma and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. The
5087 @var{size} suffix, if present, must be one of:
5088
5089 @table @code
5090 @item @samp{.b}
5091 Emits single byte values.
5092 @item @samp{.d}
5093 Emits 8-byte values.
5094 @item @samp{.l}
5095 Emits 4-byte values.
5096 @item @samp{.p}
5097 Emits 12-byte values.
5098 @item @samp{.s}
5099 Emits 4-byte values.
5100 @item @samp{.w}
5101 Emits 2-byte values.
5102 @item @samp{.x}
5103 Emits 12-byte values.
5104 @end table
5105
5106 Note - unlike the @code{.dcb} directive the @samp{.d}, @samp{.s} and @samp{.x}
5107 suffixes do not indicate that floating-point values are to be inserted.
5108
5109 If the @var{size} suffix is omitted then @samp{.w} is assumed.
5110
5111 The byte ordering is target dependent.
5112
5113
5114 @ifset COFF
5115 @node Def
5116 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
5117
5118 @cindex @code{def} directive
5119 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
5120 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
5121 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
5122 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
5123 @end ifset
5124
5125 @ifset aout
5126 @node Desc
5127 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
5128
5129 @cindex @code{desc} directive
5130 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
5131 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
5132 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
5133 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
5134
5135 @ifset COFF
5136 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
5137 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
5138 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
5139 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
5140 @end ifset
5141 @end ifset
5142
5143 @ifset COFF
5144 @node Dim
5145 @section @code{.dim}
5146
5147 @cindex @code{dim} directive
5148 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5149 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5150 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5151 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
5152 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5153 @end ifset
5154
5155 @node Double
5156 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5157
5158 @cindex @code{double} directive
5159 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
5160 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5161 assembles floating point numbers.
5162 @ifset GENERIC
5163 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5164 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5165 @end ifset
5166 @ifclear GENERIC
5167 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5168 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5169 in @sc{ieee} format.
5170 @end ifset
5171 @end ifclear
5172
5173 @node Eject
5174 @section @code{.eject}
5175
5176 @cindex @code{eject} directive
5177 @cindex new page, in listings
5178 @cindex page, in listings
5179 @cindex listing control: new page
5180 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5181
5182 @node Else
5183 @section @code{.else}
5184
5185 @cindex @code{else} directive
5186 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5187 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
5188 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5189 was false.
5190
5191 @node Elseif
5192 @section @code{.elseif}
5193
5194 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
5195 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5196 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
5197 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5198
5199 @node End
5200 @section @code{.end}
5201
5202 @cindex @code{end} directive
5203 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
5204 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5205
5206 @ifset COFF
5207 @node Endef
5208 @section @code{.endef}
5209
5210 @cindex @code{endef} directive
5211 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5212 @code{.def}.
5213 @end ifset
5214
5215 @node Endfunc
5216 @section @code{.endfunc}
5217 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5218 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5219
5220 @node Endif
5221 @section @code{.endif}
5222
5223 @cindex @code{endif} directive
5224 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5225 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5226 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5227
5228 @node Equ
5229 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5230
5231 @cindex @code{equ} directive
5232 @cindex assigning values to symbols
5233 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
5234 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5235 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5236
5237 @ifset HPPA
5238 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5239 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5240 @end ifset
5241
5242 @ifset Z80
5243 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5244 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5245 On the Z80 it is an error if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5246 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5247 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5248 @end ifset
5249
5250 @node Equiv
5251 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5252 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5253 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5254 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5255 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5256 undefined.
5257
5258 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5259 @smallexample
5260 .ifdef SYM
5261 .err
5262 .endif
5263 .equ SYM,VAL
5264 @end smallexample
5265 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5266
5267 @node Eqv
5268 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5269 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5270 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5271 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5272 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5273 value is taken.
5274
5275 @node Err
5276 @section @code{.err}
5277 @cindex @code{err} directive
5278 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5279 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5280 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5281
5282 @node Error
5283 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5284 @cindex error directive
5285
5286 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5287 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5288 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5289 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5290
5291 @smallexample
5292 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5293 @end smallexample
5294
5295 @node Exitm
5296 @section @code{.exitm}
5297 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5298
5299 @node Extern
5300 @section @code{.extern}
5301
5302 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5303 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5304 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5305 all undefined symbols as external.
5306
5307 @node Fail
5308 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5309
5310 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5311 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5312 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5313 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5314 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5315 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5316
5317 @node File
5318 @section @code{.file}
5319 @cindex @code{file} directive
5320
5321 @ifclear no-file-dir
5322 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5323 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5324 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5325
5326 @subheading Default Version
5327
5328 @cindex logical file name
5329 @cindex file name, logical
5330 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5331 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5332
5333 @smallexample
5334 .file @var{string}
5335 @end smallexample
5336
5337 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5338 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5339 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5340 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5341 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5342
5343 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5344 @end ifclear
5345
5346 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5347 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5348
5349 @smallexample
5350 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5351 @end smallexample
5352
5353 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5354 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5355 literal.
5356
5357 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5358 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5359 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5360 entries will have.
5361
5362 @node Fill
5363 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5364
5365 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5366 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5367 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5368 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5369 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5370 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5371 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5372 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5373 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5374 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5375 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5376 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5377 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5378 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5379
5380 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5381 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5382 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5383 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5384
5385 @node Float
5386 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5387
5388 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5389 @cindex @code{float} directive
5390 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5391 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5392 @ifset GENERIC
5393 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5394 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5395 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5396 @end ifset
5397 @ifclear GENERIC
5398 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5399 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5400 in @sc{ieee} format.
5401 @end ifset
5402 @end ifclear
5403
5404 @node Func
5405 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5406 @cindex @code{func} directive
5407 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5408 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5409 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5410 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5411 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5412 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5413 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5414 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5415
5416 @node Global
5417 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5418
5419 @cindex @code{global} directive
5420 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5421 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5422 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5423 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5424 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5425 from another file linked into the same program.
5426
5427 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5428 compatibility with other assemblers.
5429
5430 @ifset HPPA
5431 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5432 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5433 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5434 @end ifset
5435
5436 @ifset ELF
5437 @node Gnu_attribute
5438 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5439 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5440
5441 @node Hidden
5442 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5443
5444 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5445 @cindex visibility
5446 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5447 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5448 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5449
5450 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5451 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5452 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5453 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5454 @end ifset
5455
5456 @node hword
5457 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5458
5459 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5460 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5461 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5462 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5463 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5464 a 16 bit number for each.
5465
5466 @ifset GENERIC
5467 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5468 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5469 @end ifset
5470 @ifclear GENERIC
5471 @ifset W32
5472 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5473 @end ifset
5474 @ifset W16
5475 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5476 @end ifset
5477 @end ifclear
5478
5479 @node Ident
5480 @section @code{.ident}
5481
5482 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5483
5484 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5485 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5486 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5487 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5488 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5489 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5490 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5491
5492 @node If
5493 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5494
5495 @cindex conditional assembly
5496 @cindex @code{if} directive
5497 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5498 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5499 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5500 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5501 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5502 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5503 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5504 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5505
5506 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5507 @table @code
5508 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5509 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5510 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5511 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5512 is considered to be undefined.
5513
5514 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5515 @item .ifb @var{text}
5516 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5517
5518 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5519 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5520 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5521 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5522 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5523 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5524 string comparison is case sensitive.
5525
5526 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5527 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5528 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5529
5530 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5531 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5532 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5533
5534 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5535 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5536 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5537 equal to zero.
5538
5539 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5540 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5541 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5542
5543 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5544 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5545 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5546 to zero.
5547
5548 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5549 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5550 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5551
5552 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5553 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5554 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5555 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5556
5557 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5558 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5559 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5560 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5561
5562 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5563 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5564 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5565 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5566 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5567 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5568 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5569
5570 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5571 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5572 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5573 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5574
5575 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5576 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5577 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5578 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5579 @end table
5580
5581 @node Incbin
5582 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5583
5584 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5585 @cindex binary files, including
5586 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5587 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5588 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5589 around @var{file}.
5590
5591 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5592 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5593 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5594 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5595 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5596
5597 @node Include
5598 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5599
5600 @cindex @code{include} directive
5601 @cindex supporting files, including
5602 @cindex files, including
5603 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5604 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5605 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5606 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5607 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5608 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5609 around @var{file}.
5610
5611 @node Int
5612 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5613
5614 @cindex @code{int} directive
5615 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5616 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5617 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5618 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5619 of target the assembly is for.
5620
5621 @ifclear GENERIC
5622 @ifset H8
5623 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5624 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5625 32-bit integers.
5626 @end ifset
5627 @end ifclear
5628
5629 @ifset ELF
5630 @node Internal
5631 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5632
5633 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5634 @cindex visibility
5635 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5636 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5637 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5638
5639 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5640 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5641 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5642 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5643 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5644 @end ifset
5645
5646 @node Irp
5647 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5648
5649 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5650 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5651 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5652 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5653 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5654 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5655 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5656 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5657
5658 For example, assembling
5659
5660 @example
5661 .irp param,1,2,3
5662 move d\param,sp@@-
5663 .endr
5664 @end example
5665
5666 is equivalent to assembling
5667
5668 @example
5669 move d1,sp@@-
5670 move d2,sp@@-
5671 move d3,sp@@-
5672 @end example
5673
5674 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5675
5676 @node Irpc
5677 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5678
5679 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5680 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5681 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5682 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5683 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5684 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5685 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5686 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5687
5688 For example, assembling
5689
5690 @example
5691 .irpc param,123
5692 move d\param,sp@@-
5693 .endr
5694 @end example
5695
5696 is equivalent to assembling
5697
5698 @example
5699 move d1,sp@@-
5700 move d2,sp@@-
5701 move d3,sp@@-
5702 @end example
5703
5704 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5705 at @xref{Macro}.
5706
5707 @node Lcomm
5708 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5709
5710 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5711 @cindex local common symbols
5712 @cindex symbols, local common
5713 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5714 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5715 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5716 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5717 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5718 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5719
5720 @ifset GENERIC
5721 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5722 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5723 @end ifset
5724
5725 @ifset HPPA
5726 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5727 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5728 @end ifset
5729
5730 @node Lflags
5731 @section @code{.lflags}
5732
5733 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5734 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5735 assemblers, but ignores it.
5736
5737 @ifclear no-line-dir
5738 @node Line
5739 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5740
5741 @cindex @code{line} directive
5742 @cindex logical line number
5743 @ifset aout
5744 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5745 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5746 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5747 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5748 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5749 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5750 @end ifset
5751
5752 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5753 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5754 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5755 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5756 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5757
5758 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5759 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5760 debugging.
5761 @end ifclear
5762
5763 @node Linkonce
5764 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5765 @cindex COMDAT
5766 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5767 @cindex common sections
5768 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5769 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5770 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5771 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5772 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5773 unique.
5774
5775 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5776 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5777 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5778
5779 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5780 following strings. For example:
5781 @smallexample
5782 .linkonce same_size
5783 @end smallexample
5784 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5785
5786 @table @code
5787 @item discard
5788 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5789
5790 @item one_only
5791 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5792
5793 @item same_size
5794 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5795
5796 @item same_contents
5797 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5798 @end table
5799
5800 @node List
5801 @section @code{.list}
5802
5803 @cindex @code{list} directive
5804 @cindex listing control, turning on
5805 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5806 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5807 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5808 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5809 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5810
5811 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5812 @samp{-a} command-line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5813 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5814
5815 @node Ln
5816 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5817
5818 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5819 @ifclear no-line-dir
5820 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5821 @end ifclear
5822 @ifset no-line-dir
5823 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5824 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5825 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5826 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5827 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5828 @end ifset
5829
5830 @node Loc
5831 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5832 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5833 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5834 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5835 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5836 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5837 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5838 the row is added.
5839
5840 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5841
5842 @table @code
5843 @item basic_block
5844 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5845 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5846
5847 @item prologue_end
5848 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5849 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5850
5851 @item epilogue_begin
5852 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5853 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5854
5855 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5856 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5857 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5858 either 0 or 1.
5859
5860 @item isa @var{value}
5861 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5862 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5863
5864 @item discriminator @var{value}
5865 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5866 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5867
5868 @item view @var{value}
5869 This option causes a row to be added to @code{.debug_line} in reference to the
5870 current address (which might not be the same as that of the following assembly
5871 instruction), and to associate @var{value} with the @code{view} register in the
5872 @code{.debug_line} state machine. If @var{value} is a label, both the
5873 @code{view} register and the label are set to the number of prior @code{.loc}
5874 directives at the same program location. If @var{value} is the literal
5875 @code{0}, the @code{view} register is set to zero, and the assembler asserts
5876 that there aren't any prior @code{.loc} directives at the same program
5877 location. If @var{value} is the literal @code{-0}, the assembler arrange for
5878 the @code{view} register to be reset in this row, even if there are prior
5879 @code{.loc} directives at the same program location.
5880
5881 @end table
5882
5883 @node Loc_mark_labels
5884 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5885 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5886 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5887 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5888 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5889 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5890 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5891 this function respectively.
5892
5893 @ifset ELF
5894 @node Local
5895 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5896
5897 @cindex @code{local} directive
5898 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5899 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5900 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5901 they will be created.
5902
5903 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5904 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5905 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5906 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5907 @end ifset
5908
5909 @node Long
5910 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5911
5912 @cindex @code{long} directive
5913 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5914
5915 @ignore
5916 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5917 @c what it really ought to do
5918 @node Lsym
5919 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5920
5921 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5922 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5923 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5924 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5925 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5926 the same as the expression value:
5927 @smallexample
5928 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5929 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5930 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5931 @end smallexample
5932 @noindent
5933 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5934 @end ignore
5935
5936 @node Macro
5937 @section @code{.macro}
5938
5939 @cindex macros
5940 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5941 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5942 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5943
5944 @example
5945 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5946 .long \from
5947 .if \to-\from
5948 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5949 .endif
5950 .endm
5951 @end example
5952
5953 @noindent
5954 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5955
5956 @example
5957 .long 0
5958 .long 1
5959 .long 2
5960 .long 3
5961 .long 4
5962 .long 5
5963 @end example
5964
5965 @ftable @code
5966 @item .macro @var{macname}
5967 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5968 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5969 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5970 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5971 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5972 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5973 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5974 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5975 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5976 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5977 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5978 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5979
5980 @table @code
5981 @item .macro comm
5982 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5983 arguments.
5984
5985 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5986 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5987 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5988 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5989 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5990
5991 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5992 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5993 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5994 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5995 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5996 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5997 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5998 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5999
6000 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
6001 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
6002 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
6003 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
6004 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
6005
6006 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
6007 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
6008 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
6009
6010 @end table
6011
6012 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
6013 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
6014 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
6015 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
6016 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
6017 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
6018 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
6019 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
6020 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
6021 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
6022 this macro definition:
6023
6024 @example
6025 .macro label l
6026 \l:
6027 .endm
6028 @end example
6029
6030 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
6031 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
6032 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
6033 identifier.
6034
6035 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
6036 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
6037 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
6038 length specifier like this:
6039
6040 @example
6041 .macro opcode base length
6042 \base.\length
6043 .endm
6044 @end example
6045
6046 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
6047 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
6048 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
6049
6050 There are several possible ways around this problem:
6051
6052 @table @code
6053 @item Insert white space
6054 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
6055 solution. eg:
6056
6057 @example
6058 .macro label l
6059 \l :
6060 .endm
6061 @end example
6062
6063 @item Use @samp{\()}
6064 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
6065 the following text. eg:
6066
6067 @example
6068 .macro opcode base length
6069 \base\().\length
6070 .endm
6071 @end example
6072
6073 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
6074 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
6075 used as a separator. eg:
6076
6077 @example
6078 .altmacro
6079 .macro label l
6080 l&:
6081 .endm
6082 @end example
6083 @end table
6084
6085 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
6086 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
6087 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
6088
6089 @item .endm
6090 @cindex @code{endm} directive
6091 Mark the end of a macro definition.
6092
6093 @item .exitm
6094 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
6095 Exit early from the current macro definition.
6096
6097 @cindex number of macros executed
6098 @cindex macros, count executed
6099 @item \@@
6100 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
6101 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
6102 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
6103
6104 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
6105 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
6106 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
6107 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
6108 @end ftable
6109
6110 @node MRI
6111 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
6112
6113 @cindex @code{mri} directive
6114 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
6115 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
6116 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
6117 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
6118 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
6119
6120 @node Noaltmacro
6121 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
6122 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
6123
6124 @node Nolist
6125 @section @code{.nolist}
6126
6127 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
6128 @cindex listing control, turning off
6129 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
6130 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
6131 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
6132 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
6133 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
6134
6135 @node Nops
6136 @section @code{.nops @var{size}[, @var{control}]}
6137
6138 @cindex @code{nops} directive
6139 @cindex filling memory with no-op instructions
6140 This directive emits @var{size} bytes filled with no-op instructions.
6141 @var{size} is absolute expression, which must be a positve value.
6142 @var{control} controls how no-op instructions should be generated. If
6143 the comma and @var{control} are omitted, @var{control} is assumed to be
6144 zero.
6145
6146 Note: For Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 targets, @var{control} specifies
6147 the size limit of a no-op instruction. The valid values of @var{control}
6148 are between 0 and 4 in 16-bit mode, between 0 and 7 when tuning for
6149 older processors in 32-bit mode, between 0 and 11 in 64-bit mode or when
6150 tuning for newer processors in 32-bit mode. When 0 is used, the no-op
6151 instruction size limit is set to the maximum supported size.
6152
6153 @node Octa
6154 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6155
6156 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on some? Or warn?
6157 @cindex @code{octa} directive
6158 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6159 @cindex sixteen byte integer
6160 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
6161 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6162
6163 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6164 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6165
6166 @node Offset
6167 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6168
6169 @cindex @code{offset} directive
6170 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
6171 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
6172 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6173 directive.
6174
6175 @node Org
6176 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6177
6178 @cindex @code{org} directive
6179 @cindex location counter, advancing
6180 @cindex advancing location counter
6181 @cindex current address, advancing
6182 Advance the location counter of the current section to
6183 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6184 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
6185 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6186 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
6187 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6188 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6189 is the same as the current subsection.
6190
6191 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6192 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6193 backwards.
6194
6195 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6196 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6197 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6198 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6199 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6200 a chance to share your improved assembler.
6201
6202 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6203 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
6204 people's assemblers.
6205
6206 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6207 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6208 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6209 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
6210
6211 @node P2align
6212 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
6213
6214 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6215 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
6216 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6217 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6218 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6219 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6220 counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
6221 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
6222
6223 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6224 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
6225 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
6226 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6227 with no-op instructions.
6228
6229 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
6230 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6231 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6232 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
6233 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6234 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6235 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6236
6237 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6238 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6239 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6240 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6241 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6242 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
6243 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6244 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6245 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6246 undefined.
6247
6248 @ifset ELF
6249 @node PopSection
6250 @section @code{.popsection}
6251
6252 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
6253 @cindex Section Stack
6254 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6255 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6256 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6257 (@pxref{Previous}).
6258
6259 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6260 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6261 stack.
6262 @end ifset
6263
6264 @ifset ELF
6265 @node Previous
6266 @section @code{.previous}
6267
6268 @cindex @code{previous} directive
6269 @cindex Section Stack
6270 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6271 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6272 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6273 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6274
6275 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6276 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6277 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6278 subsections). For example:
6279
6280 @smallexample
6281 .section A
6282 .subsection 1
6283 .word 0x1234
6284 .subsection 2
6285 .word 0x5678
6286 .previous
6287 .word 0x9abc
6288 @end smallexample
6289
6290 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6291 section A. Whilst:
6292
6293 @smallexample
6294 .section A
6295 .subsection 1
6296 # Now in section A subsection 1
6297 .word 0x1234
6298 .section B
6299 .subsection 0
6300 # Now in section B subsection 0
6301 .word 0x5678
6302 .subsection 1
6303 # Now in section B subsection 1
6304 .word 0x9abc
6305 .previous
6306 # Now in section B subsection 0
6307 .word 0xdef0
6308 @end smallexample
6309
6310 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6311 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6312
6313 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6314 the top section on the section stack.
6315 @end ifset
6316
6317 @node Print
6318 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6319
6320 @cindex @code{print} directive
6321 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6322 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6323
6324 @ifset ELF
6325 @node Protected
6326 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6327
6328 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6329 @cindex visibility
6330 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6331 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6332
6333 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6334 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6335 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6336 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6337 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6338 this.
6339 @end ifset
6340
6341 @node Psize
6342 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6343
6344 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6345 @cindex listing control: paper size
6346 @cindex paper size, for listings
6347 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6348 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6349
6350 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6351 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6352 default width is 200 columns.
6353
6354 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6355 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6356 @code{.eject}).
6357
6358 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6359 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6360
6361 @node Purgem
6362 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6363
6364 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6365 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6366 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6367
6368 @ifset ELF
6369 @node PushSection
6370 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6371
6372 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6373 @cindex Section Stack
6374 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6375 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6376 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6377 (@pxref{Previous}).
6378
6379 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6380 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6381 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6382 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6383 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6384 @end ifset
6385
6386 @node Quad
6387 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6388
6389 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6390 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6391 each bignum, it emits
6392 @ifclear bignum-16
6393 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6394 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6395 @cindex eight-byte integer
6396 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6397
6398 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6399 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6400 @end ifclear
6401 @ifset bignum-16
6402 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6403 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6404 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6405 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6406 @end ifset
6407
6408 @node Reloc
6409 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6410
6411 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6412 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6413 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6414 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6415 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6416 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6417 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6418 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6419 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6420 section.
6421
6422 @node Rept
6423 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6424
6425 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6426 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6427 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6428
6429 For example, assembling
6430
6431 @example
6432 .rept 3
6433 .long 0
6434 .endr
6435 @end example
6436
6437 is equivalent to assembling
6438
6439 @example
6440 .long 0
6441 .long 0
6442 .long 0
6443 @end example
6444
6445 A count of zero is allowed, but nothing is generated. Negative counts are not
6446 allowed and if encountered will be treated as if they were zero.
6447
6448 @node Sbttl
6449 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6450
6451 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6452 @cindex subtitles for listings
6453 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6454 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6455 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6456
6457 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6458 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6459
6460 @ifset COFF
6461 @node Scl
6462 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6463
6464 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6465 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6466 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6467 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6468 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6469 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6470 symbolic debugging information.
6471 @end ifset
6472
6473 @ifset COFF-ELF
6474 @node Section
6475 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6476
6477 @cindex named section
6478 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6479 named @var{name}.
6480
6481 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6482 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6483 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6484
6485 @ifset COFF
6486 @ifset ELF
6487 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6488 @subheading COFF Version
6489 @end ifset
6490
6491 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6492 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6493 ways:
6494
6495 @smallexample
6496 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6497 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6498 @end smallexample
6499
6500 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6501 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6502
6503 @table @code
6504 @item b
6505 bss section (uninitialized data)
6506 @item n
6507 section is not loaded
6508 @item w
6509 writable section
6510 @item d
6511 data section
6512 @item e
6513 exclude section from linking
6514 @item r
6515 read-only section
6516 @item x
6517 executable section
6518 @item s
6519 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6520 @item a
6521 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6522 @item y
6523 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6524 @item 0-9
6525 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6526 @end table
6527
6528 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6529 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6530 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6531 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6532 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6533
6534 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6535 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6536 @end ifset
6537
6538 @ifset ELF
6539 @ifset COFF
6540 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6541 @subheading ELF Version
6542 @end ifset
6543
6544 @cindex Section Stack
6545 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6546 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6547 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6548 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6549
6550 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6551 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6552
6553 @smallexample
6554 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6555 @end smallexample
6556
6557 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6558 @kindex --sectname-subst
6559 @cindex section name substitution
6560 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6561 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6562 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6563
6564 @smallexample
6565 .macro exception_code
6566 .section %S.exception
6567 [exception code here]
6568 .previous
6569 .endm
6570
6571 .text
6572 [code]
6573 exception_code
6574 [...]
6575
6576 .section .init
6577 [init code]
6578 exception_code
6579 [...]
6580 @end smallexample
6581
6582 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6583 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6584 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between ancillary sections that are
6585 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from ancillary sections that
6586 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6587 macros just for that purpose.
6588
6589 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6590 combination of the following characters:
6591
6592 @table @code
6593 @item a
6594 section is allocatable
6595 @item d
6596 section is a GNU_MBIND section
6597 @item e
6598 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6599 @item w
6600 section is writable
6601 @item x
6602 section is executable
6603 @item M
6604 section is mergeable
6605 @item S
6606 section contains zero terminated strings
6607 @item G
6608 section is a member of a section group
6609 @item T
6610 section is used for thread-local-storage
6611 @item ?
6612 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6613 @item @code{<number>}
6614 a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6615 field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6616 also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6617 resulting value.
6618 @item @code{<target specific>}
6619 some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6620 @end table
6621
6622 Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are
6623 a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific
6624 flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp},
6625 @code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6626 (@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6627 section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
6628
6629 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6630
6631 @table @code
6632 @item @@progbits
6633 section contains data
6634 @item @@nobits
6635 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6636 @item @@note
6637 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6638 @item @@init_array
6639 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6640 @item @@fini_array
6641 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6642 @item @@preinit_array
6643 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6644 @item @@@code{<number>}
6645 a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6646 @item @@@code{<target specific>}
6647 some targets extend this list with their own types
6648 @end table
6649
6650 Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be
6651 enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6652
6653 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6654 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6655 @code{%} character.
6656
6657 Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6658 special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different
6659 type will generate an error from the assembler.
6660
6661 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6662 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6663
6664 @smallexample
6665 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6666 @end smallexample
6667
6668 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6669 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6670 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6671 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6672 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6673 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6674 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6675 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6676 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6677
6678 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6679 be present along with an additional field like this:
6680
6681 @smallexample
6682 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6683 @end smallexample
6684
6685 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6686 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6687
6688 @table @code
6689 @item comdat
6690 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6691 @item .gnu.linkonce
6692 an alias for comdat
6693 @end table
6694
6695 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6696 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6697
6698 @smallexample
6699 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6700 @end smallexample
6701
6702 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6703 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6704 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6705 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6706 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6707 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6708
6709 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6710 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6711 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6712 executable. The section will contain data.
6713
6714 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6715 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6716
6717 @smallexample
6718 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6719 @end smallexample
6720
6721 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6722 separated flags:
6723
6724 @table @code
6725 @item #alloc
6726 section is allocatable
6727 @item #write
6728 section is writable
6729 @item #execinstr
6730 section is executable
6731 @item #exclude
6732 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6733 @item #tls
6734 section is used for thread local storage
6735 @end table
6736
6737 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6738 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6739 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6740 work.
6741 @end ifset
6742 @end ifset
6743
6744 @node Set
6745 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6746
6747 @cindex @code{set} directive
6748 @cindex symbol value, setting
6749 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6750 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6751 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6752 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6753
6754 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6755 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6756 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6757 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6758 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6759 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6760 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6761 different symbols.
6762
6763 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6764 file is the last value stored into it.
6765
6766 @ifset Z80
6767 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6768 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6769 @end ifset
6770
6771 @node Short
6772 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6773
6774 @cindex @code{short} directive
6775 @ifset GENERIC
6776 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6777 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6778
6779 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6780 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6781 @end ifset
6782 @ifclear GENERIC
6783 @ifset W16
6784 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6785 @end ifset
6786 @ifset W32
6787 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6788 a 16 bit number for each.
6789 @end ifset
6790 @end ifclear
6791
6792 @node Single
6793 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6794
6795 @cindex @code{single} directive
6796 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6797 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6798 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6799 @ifset GENERIC
6800 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6801 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6802 @end ifset
6803 @ifclear GENERIC
6804 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6805 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6806 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6807 @end ifset
6808 @end ifclear
6809
6810 @ifset COFF-ELF
6811 @node Size
6812 @section @code{.size}
6813
6814 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6815
6816 @ifset COFF
6817 @ifset ELF
6818 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6819 @subheading COFF Version
6820 @end ifset
6821
6822 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6823 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6824 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6825
6826 @smallexample
6827 .size @var{expression}
6828 @end smallexample
6829
6830 @end ifset
6831
6832 @ifset ELF
6833 @ifset COFF
6834 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6835 @subheading ELF Version
6836 @end ifset
6837
6838 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6839 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6840
6841 @smallexample
6842 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6843 @end smallexample
6844
6845 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6846 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6847 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6848 symbols.
6849 @end ifset
6850 @end ifset
6851
6852 @ifclear no-space-dir
6853 @node Skip
6854 @section @code{.skip @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
6855
6856 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6857 @cindex filling memory
6858 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6859 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6860 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6861 @samp{.space}.
6862 @end ifclear
6863
6864 @node Sleb128
6865 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6866
6867 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6868 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6869 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6870 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6871
6872 @ifclear no-space-dir
6873 @node Space
6874 @section @code{.space @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
6875
6876 @cindex @code{space} directive
6877 @cindex filling memory
6878 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6879 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6880 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6881 as @samp{.skip}.
6882
6883 @ifset HPPA
6884 @quotation
6885 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6886 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6887 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6888 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6889 for a summary.
6890 @end quotation
6891 @end ifset
6892 @end ifclear
6893
6894 @ifset have-stabs
6895 @node Stab
6896 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6897
6898 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6899 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6900 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6901 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6902 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6903 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6904 Up to five fields are required:
6905
6906 @table @var
6907 @item string
6908 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6909 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6910 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6911 using this field.
6912
6913 @item type
6914 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6915 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6916 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6917
6918 @item other
6919 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6920 low 8 bits of this expression.
6921
6922 @item desc
6923 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6924 bits of this expression.
6925
6926 @item value
6927 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6928 @end table
6929
6930 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6931 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6932 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6933 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6934
6935 @table @code
6936 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6937 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6938
6939 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6940 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6941 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6942 strings.
6943
6944 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6945 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6946 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6947 assembled.
6948
6949 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6950 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6951 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6952
6953 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6954 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6955 All five fields are specified.
6956 @end table
6957 @end ifset
6958 @c end have-stabs
6959
6960 @node String
6961 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6962 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6963
6964 @cindex string, copying to object file
6965 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6966 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6967 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6968 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6969 @cindex @code{string} directive
6970 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6971 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6972 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6973 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6974
6975 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6976 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6977 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6978 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6979
6980 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6981 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6982 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6983 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6984
6985 Example:
6986 @smallexample
6987 .string32 "BYE"
6988 expands to:
6989 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6990 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6991 @end smallexample
6992
6993
6994 @node Struct
6995 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6996
6997 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6998 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6999 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
7000 @smallexample
7001 .struct 0
7002 field1:
7003 .struct field1 + 4
7004 field2:
7005 .struct field2 + 4
7006 field3:
7007 @end smallexample
7008 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
7009 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
7010 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
7011 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
7012 before further assembly.
7013
7014 @ifset ELF
7015 @node SubSection
7016 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
7017
7018 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
7019 @cindex Section Stack
7020 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
7021 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
7022 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
7023 (@pxref{Previous}).
7024
7025 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
7026 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
7027 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
7028 @end ifset
7029
7030 @ifset ELF
7031 @node Symver
7032 @section @code{.symver}
7033 @cindex @code{symver} directive
7034 @cindex symbol versioning
7035 @cindex versions of symbols
7036 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
7037 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
7038 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
7039 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
7040 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
7041 shared library.
7042
7043 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
7044 @smallexample
7045 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
7046 @end smallexample
7047 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
7048 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
7049 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
7050 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
7051 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
7052 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
7053 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
7054 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
7055 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
7056 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
7057 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
7058 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
7059 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
7060 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
7061
7062 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
7063 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
7064 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
7065 symbol table.
7066
7067 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
7068 @smallexample
7069 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
7070 @end smallexample
7071 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
7072 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
7073 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
7074 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
7075
7076 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
7077 @smallexample
7078 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
7079 @end smallexample
7080 When @var{name} is not defined within the
7081 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
7082 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
7083 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
7084 @end ifset
7085
7086 @ifset COFF
7087 @node Tag
7088 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
7089
7090 @cindex COFF structure debugging
7091 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
7092 @cindex @code{tag} directive
7093 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
7094 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
7095 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
7096 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
7097 @end ifset
7098
7099 @node Text
7100 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
7101
7102 @cindex @code{text} directive
7103 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
7104 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
7105 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
7106 is used.
7107
7108 @node Title
7109 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
7110
7111 @cindex @code{title} directive
7112 @cindex listing control: title line
7113 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
7114 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
7115
7116 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
7117 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
7118
7119 @ifset COFF-ELF
7120 @node Type
7121 @section @code{.type}
7122
7123 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
7124
7125 @ifset COFF
7126 @ifset ELF
7127 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7128 @subheading COFF Version
7129 @end ifset
7130
7131 @cindex COFF symbol type
7132 @cindex symbol type, COFF
7133 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
7134 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
7135 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
7136
7137 @smallexample
7138 .type @var{int}
7139 @end smallexample
7140
7141 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7142 entry.
7143
7144 @end ifset
7145
7146 @ifset ELF
7147 @ifset COFF
7148 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7149 @subheading ELF Version
7150 @end ifset
7151
7152 @cindex ELF symbol type
7153 @cindex symbol type, ELF
7154 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7155 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7156
7157 @smallexample
7158 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7159 @end smallexample
7160
7161 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7162 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
7163 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7164 compatibility with various other assemblers.
7165
7166 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7167 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7168 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
7169 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7170 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7171 assemblers.
7172
7173 The syntaxes supported are:
7174
7175 @smallexample
7176 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7177 .type <name>,#<type>
7178 .type <name>,@@<type>
7179 .type <name>,%<type>
7180 .type <name>,"<type>"
7181 @end smallexample
7182
7183 The types supported are:
7184
7185 @table @gcctabopt
7186 @item STT_FUNC
7187 @itemx function
7188 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7189
7190 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7191 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
7192 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7193 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7194
7195 @item STT_OBJECT
7196 @itemx object
7197 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7198
7199 @item STT_TLS
7200 @itemx tls_object
7201 Mark the symbol as being a thread-local data object.
7202
7203 @item STT_COMMON
7204 @itemx common
7205 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7206
7207 @item STT_NOTYPE
7208 @itemx notype
7209 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
7210
7211 @item gnu_unique_object
7212 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
7213 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7214 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7215 systems).
7216
7217 @end table
7218
7219 Changing between incompatible types other than from/to STT_NOTYPE will
7220 result in a diagnostic. An intermediate change to STT_NOTYPE will silence
7221 this.
7222
7223 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7224
7225 @end ifset
7226 @end ifset
7227
7228 @node Uleb128
7229 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7230
7231 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7232 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
7233 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7234 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7235
7236 @ifset COFF
7237 @node Val
7238 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7239
7240 @cindex @code{val} directive
7241 @cindex COFF value attribute
7242 @cindex value attribute, COFF
7243 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7244 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7245 entry.
7246 @end ifset
7247
7248 @ifset ELF
7249 @node Version
7250 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7251
7252 @cindex @code{version} directive
7253 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7254 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7255 @end ifset
7256
7257 @ifset ELF
7258 @node VTableEntry
7259 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7260
7261 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7262 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7263 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7264
7265 @node VTableInherit
7266 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7267
7268 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7269 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7270 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7271 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7272 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7273 @end ifset
7274
7275 @node Warning
7276 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7277 @cindex warning directive
7278 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7279 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7280
7281 @node Weak
7282 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7283
7284 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7285 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7286 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7287
7288 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7289 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7290 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7291
7292 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7293 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7294 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7295
7296 @node Weakref
7297 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7298
7299 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7300 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7301 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7302 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7303 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7304 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7305
7306 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7307 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7308 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7309 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7310 had the references to the alias removed.
7311
7312 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7313 within the assembler.
7314
7315 @node Word
7316 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7317
7318 @cindex @code{word} directive
7319 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7320 separated by commas.
7321 @ifclear GENERIC
7322 @ifset W32
7323 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7324 @end ifset
7325 @ifset W16
7326 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7327 @end ifset
7328 @end ifclear
7329 @ifset GENERIC
7330
7331 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7332 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7333 @end ifset
7334
7335 @c on sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7336 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7337 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7338 @cindex difference tables altered
7339 @cindex altered difference tables
7340 @quotation
7341 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7342 @end quotation
7343
7344 @ifset GENERIC
7345 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7346 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7347 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7348 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7349
7350 @end ifset
7351 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7352 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7353 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7354 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7355 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7356 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7357 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7358 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7359 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7360 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7361 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7362 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7363 @code{sym2}.
7364
7365 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7366 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7367 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7368 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7369 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7370 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7371 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7372
7373 @ifset INTERNALS
7374 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7375 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7376 assembly language programmers.
7377 @end ifset
7378 @end ifset
7379 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7380
7381 @ifclear no-space-dir
7382 @node Zero
7383 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7384
7385 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7386 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7387 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7388 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7389 so it can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7390 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7391 @end ifclear
7392
7393 @ifset ELF
7394 @node 2byte
7395 @section @code{.2byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7396 @cindex @code{2byte} directive
7397 @cindex two-byte integer
7398 @cindex integer, 2-byte
7399
7400 This directive expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas. If there
7401 are no expressions then the directive does nothing. Otherwise each expression
7402 is evaluated in turn and placed in the next two bytes of the current output
7403 section, using the endian model of the target. If an expression will not fit
7404 in two bytes, a warning message is displayed and the least significant two
7405 bytes of the expression's value are used. If an expression cannot be evaluated
7406 at assembly time then relocations will be generated in order to compute the
7407 value at link time.
7408
7409 This directive does not apply any alignment before or after inserting the
7410 values. As a result of this, if relocations are generated, they may be
7411 different from those used for inserting values with a guaranteed alignment.
7412
7413 This directive is only available for ELF targets,
7414
7415 @node 4byte
7416 @section @code{.4byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7417 @cindex @code{4byte} directive
7418 @cindex four-byte integer
7419 @cindex integer, 4-byte
7420
7421 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, four byte
7422 long values into the output.
7423
7424 @node 8byte
7425 @section @code{.8byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7426 @cindex @code{8byte} directive
7427 @cindex eight-byte integer
7428 @cindex integer, 8-byte
7429
7430 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, eight
7431 byte long bignum values into the output.
7432
7433 @end ifset
7434
7435 @node Deprecated
7436 @section Deprecated Directives
7437
7438 @cindex deprecated directives
7439 @cindex obsolescent directives
7440 One day these directives won't work.
7441 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7442 @table @t
7443 @item .abort
7444 @item .line
7445 @end table
7446
7447 @ifset ELF
7448 @node Object Attributes
7449 @chapter Object Attributes
7450 @cindex object attributes
7451
7452 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7453 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7454 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7455 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7456 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7457 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7458 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7459 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7460 newer generation at run-time.
7461
7462 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7463 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7464 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7465 correctly.
7466
7467 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7468 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7469 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7470 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7471 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7472 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7473
7474 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7475 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7476
7477 @menu
7478 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7479 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7480 @end menu
7481
7482 @node GNU Object Attributes
7483 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7484
7485 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7486 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7487
7488 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7489 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7490 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7491 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7492 architecture-dependent ones.
7493
7494 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7495
7496 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7497
7498 @table @r
7499 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7500 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7501 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7502 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7503 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7504 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7505 @end table
7506
7507 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7508
7509 @table @r
7510 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7511 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7512
7513 @itemize @bullet
7514 @item
7515 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7516 @item
7517 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7518 double-precision FPU.
7519 @item
7520 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7521 @item
7522 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7523 @item
7524 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7525 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7526 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7527 @item
7528 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7529 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7530 general-purpose registers.
7531 @item
7532 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7533 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7534 @item
7535 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7536 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7537 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7538 @end itemize
7539 @end table
7540
7541 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7542
7543 @table @r
7544 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7545 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7546
7547 @itemize @bullet
7548 @item
7549 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7550 @item
7551 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7552 @item
7553 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7554 @item
7555 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7556 @end itemize
7557
7558 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7559 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7560
7561 @itemize @bullet
7562 @item
7563 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7564 @item
7565 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7566 @item
7567 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7568 @item
7569 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7570 @end itemize
7571 @end table
7572
7573 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7574
7575 @table @r
7576 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7577 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7578
7579 @itemize @bullet
7580 @item
7581 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7582 @item
7583 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7584 @item
7585 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7586 @end itemize
7587 @end table
7588
7589 @subsection MSP430 Attributes
7590
7591 @table @r
7592 @item Tag_GNU_MSP430_Data_Region (4)
7593 The data region used by this object file. The value will be:
7594
7595 @itemize @bullet
7596 @item
7597 0 for files not using the large memory model.
7598 @item
7599 1 for files which have been compiled with the condition that all
7600 data is in the lower memory region, i.e. below address 0x10000.
7601 @item
7602 2 for files which allow data to be placed in the full 20-bit memory range.
7603 @end itemize
7604 @end table
7605
7606 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7607 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7608
7609 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7610 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7611 mailing list.
7612
7613 @itemize @bullet
7614 @item
7615 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7616 @item
7617 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7618 @item
7619 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7620 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7621 @item
7622 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7623 @item
7624 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7625 @item
7626 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7627 @end itemize
7628
7629 @end ifset
7630
7631 @ifset GENERIC
7632 @node Machine Dependencies
7633 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7634
7635 @cindex machine dependencies
7636 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7637 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7638 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7639 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7640 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7641 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7642 optimization.
7643
7644 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7645 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7646 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7647
7648 @menu
7649 @ifset AARCH64
7650 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7651 @end ifset
7652 @ifset ALPHA
7653 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7654 @end ifset
7655 @ifset ARC
7656 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7657 @end ifset
7658 @ifset ARM
7659 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7660 @end ifset
7661 @ifset AVR
7662 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7663 @end ifset
7664 @ifset Blackfin
7665 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7666 @end ifset
7667 @ifset BPF
7668 * BPF-Dependent:: BPF Dependent Features
7669 @end ifset
7670 @ifset CR16
7671 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7672 @end ifset
7673 @ifset CRIS
7674 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7675 @end ifset
7676 @ifset CSKY
7677 * C-SKY-Dependent:: C-SKY Dependent Features
7678 @end ifset
7679 @ifset D10V
7680 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7681 @end ifset
7682 @ifset D30V
7683 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7684 @end ifset
7685 @ifset EPIPHANY
7686 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7687 @end ifset
7688 @ifset H8/300
7689 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7690 @end ifset
7691 @ifset HPPA
7692 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7693 @end ifset
7694 @ifset I80386
7695 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7696 @end ifset
7697 @ifset IA64
7698 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7699 @end ifset
7700 @ifset IP2K
7701 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7702 @end ifset
7703 @ifset LM32
7704 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7705 @end ifset
7706 @ifset M32C
7707 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7708 @end ifset
7709 @ifset M32R
7710 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7711 @end ifset
7712 @ifset M680X0
7713 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7714 @end ifset
7715 @ifset M68HC11
7716 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7717 @end ifset
7718 @ifset S12Z
7719 * S12Z-Dependent:: S12Z Dependent Features
7720 @end ifset
7721 @ifset METAG
7722 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7723 @end ifset
7724 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7725 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7726 @end ifset
7727 @ifset MIPS
7728 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7729 @end ifset
7730 @ifset MMIX
7731 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7732 @end ifset
7733 @ifset MSP430
7734 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7735 @end ifset
7736 @ifset NDS32
7737 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7738 @end ifset
7739 @ifset NIOSII
7740 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7741 @end ifset
7742 @ifset NS32K
7743 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7744 @end ifset
7745 @ifset OPENRISC
7746 * OpenRISC-Dependent:: OpenRISC 1000 Features
7747 @end ifset
7748 @ifset PDP11
7749 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7750 @end ifset
7751 @ifset PJ
7752 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7753 @end ifset
7754 @ifset PPC
7755 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7756 @end ifset
7757 @ifset PRU
7758 * PRU-Dependent:: PRU Dependent Features
7759 @end ifset
7760 @ifset RISCV
7761 * RISC-V-Dependent:: RISC-V Dependent Features
7762 @end ifset
7763 @ifset RL78
7764 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7765 @end ifset
7766 @ifset RX
7767 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7768 @end ifset
7769 @ifset S390
7770 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7771 @end ifset
7772 @ifset SCORE
7773 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7774 @end ifset
7775 @ifset SH
7776 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7777 @end ifset
7778 @ifset SPARC
7779 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7780 @end ifset
7781 @ifset TIC54X
7782 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7783 @end ifset
7784 @ifset TIC6X
7785 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7786 @end ifset
7787 @ifset TILEGX
7788 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7789 @end ifset
7790 @ifset TILEPRO
7791 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7792 @end ifset
7793 @ifset V850
7794 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7795 @end ifset
7796 @ifset VAX
7797 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7798 @end ifset
7799 @ifset VISIUM
7800 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7801 @end ifset
7802 @ifset WASM32
7803 * WebAssembly-Dependent:: WebAssembly Dependent Features
7804 @end ifset
7805 @ifset XGATE
7806 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Dependent Features
7807 @end ifset
7808 @ifset XSTORMY16
7809 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7810 @end ifset
7811 @ifset XTENSA
7812 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7813 @end ifset
7814 @ifset Z80
7815 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7816 @end ifset
7817 @ifset Z8000
7818 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7819 @end ifset
7820 @end menu
7821
7822 @lowersections
7823 @end ifset
7824
7825 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7826 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7827 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7828 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7829 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7830 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7831 @c in both conditional blocks.
7832
7833 @ifset AARCH64
7834 @include c-aarch64.texi
7835 @end ifset
7836
7837 @ifset ALPHA
7838 @include c-alpha.texi
7839 @end ifset
7840
7841 @ifset ARC
7842 @include c-arc.texi
7843 @end ifset
7844
7845 @ifset ARM
7846 @include c-arm.texi
7847 @end ifset
7848
7849 @ifset AVR
7850 @include c-avr.texi
7851 @end ifset
7852
7853 @ifset Blackfin
7854 @include c-bfin.texi
7855 @end ifset
7856
7857 @ifset BPF
7858 @include c-bpf.texi
7859 @end ifset
7860
7861 @ifset CR16
7862 @include c-cr16.texi
7863 @end ifset
7864
7865 @ifset CRIS
7866 @include c-cris.texi
7867 @end ifset
7868
7869 @ifset CSKY
7870 @include c-csky.texi
7871 @end ifset
7872
7873 @ifset Renesas-all
7874 @ifclear GENERIC
7875 @node Machine Dependencies
7876 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7877
7878 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7879 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7880 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7881 family.
7882
7883 @menu
7884 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7885 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7886 @end menu
7887 @lowersections
7888 @end ifclear
7889 @end ifset
7890
7891 @ifset D10V
7892 @include c-d10v.texi
7893 @end ifset
7894
7895 @ifset D30V
7896 @include c-d30v.texi
7897 @end ifset
7898
7899 @ifset EPIPHANY
7900 @include c-epiphany.texi
7901 @end ifset
7902
7903 @ifset H8/300
7904 @include c-h8300.texi
7905 @end ifset
7906
7907 @ifset HPPA
7908 @include c-hppa.texi
7909 @end ifset
7910
7911 @ifset I80386
7912 @include c-i386.texi
7913 @end ifset
7914
7915 @ifset IA64
7916 @include c-ia64.texi
7917 @end ifset
7918
7919 @ifset IP2K
7920 @include c-ip2k.texi
7921 @end ifset
7922
7923 @ifset LM32
7924 @include c-lm32.texi
7925 @end ifset
7926
7927 @ifset M32C
7928 @include c-m32c.texi
7929 @end ifset
7930
7931 @ifset M32R
7932 @include c-m32r.texi
7933 @end ifset
7934
7935 @ifset M680X0
7936 @include c-m68k.texi
7937 @end ifset
7938
7939 @ifset M68HC11
7940 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7941 @end ifset
7942
7943 @ifset S12Z
7944 @include c-s12z.texi
7945 @end ifset
7946
7947 @ifset METAG
7948 @include c-metag.texi
7949 @end ifset
7950
7951 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7952 @include c-microblaze.texi
7953 @end ifset
7954
7955 @ifset MIPS
7956 @include c-mips.texi
7957 @end ifset
7958
7959 @ifset MMIX
7960 @include c-mmix.texi
7961 @end ifset
7962
7963 @ifset MSP430
7964 @include c-msp430.texi
7965 @end ifset
7966
7967 @ifset NDS32
7968 @include c-nds32.texi
7969 @end ifset
7970
7971 @ifset NIOSII
7972 @include c-nios2.texi
7973 @end ifset
7974
7975 @ifset NS32K
7976 @include c-ns32k.texi
7977 @end ifset
7978
7979 @ifset OPENRISC
7980 @include c-or1k.texi
7981 @end ifset
7982
7983 @ifset PDP11
7984 @include c-pdp11.texi
7985 @end ifset
7986
7987 @ifset PJ
7988 @include c-pj.texi
7989 @end ifset
7990
7991 @ifset PPC
7992 @include c-ppc.texi
7993 @end ifset
7994
7995 @ifset PRU
7996 @include c-pru.texi
7997 @end ifset
7998
7999 @ifset RISCV
8000 @include c-riscv.texi
8001 @end ifset
8002
8003 @ifset RL78
8004 @include c-rl78.texi
8005 @end ifset
8006
8007 @ifset RX
8008 @include c-rx.texi
8009 @end ifset
8010
8011 @ifset S390
8012 @include c-s390.texi
8013 @end ifset
8014
8015 @ifset SCORE
8016 @include c-score.texi
8017 @end ifset
8018
8019 @ifset SH
8020 @include c-sh.texi
8021 @end ifset
8022
8023 @ifset SPARC
8024 @include c-sparc.texi
8025 @end ifset
8026
8027 @ifset TIC54X
8028 @include c-tic54x.texi
8029 @end ifset
8030
8031 @ifset TIC6X
8032 @include c-tic6x.texi
8033 @end ifset
8034
8035 @ifset TILEGX
8036 @include c-tilegx.texi
8037 @end ifset
8038
8039 @ifset TILEPRO
8040 @include c-tilepro.texi
8041 @end ifset
8042
8043 @ifset V850
8044 @include c-v850.texi
8045 @end ifset
8046
8047 @ifset VAX
8048 @include c-vax.texi
8049 @end ifset
8050
8051 @ifset VISIUM
8052 @include c-visium.texi
8053 @end ifset
8054
8055 @ifset WASM32
8056 @include c-wasm32.texi
8057 @end ifset
8058
8059 @ifset XGATE
8060 @include c-xgate.texi
8061 @end ifset
8062
8063 @ifset XSTORMY16
8064 @include c-xstormy16.texi
8065 @end ifset
8066
8067 @ifset XTENSA
8068 @include c-xtensa.texi
8069 @end ifset
8070
8071 @ifset Z80
8072 @include c-z80.texi
8073 @end ifset
8074
8075 @ifset Z8000
8076 @include c-z8k.texi
8077 @end ifset
8078
8079 @ifset GENERIC
8080 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
8081 @raisesections
8082 @end ifset
8083
8084 @node Reporting Bugs
8085 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8086 @cindex bugs in assembler
8087 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
8088
8089 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
8090
8091 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
8092 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
8093 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
8094 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
8095
8096 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8097 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8098
8099 @menu
8100 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8101 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8102 @end menu
8103
8104 @node Bug Criteria
8105 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8106 @cindex bug criteria
8107
8108 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8109
8110 @itemize @bullet
8111 @cindex fatal signal
8112 @cindex assembler crash
8113 @cindex crash of assembler
8114 @item
8115 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8116 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
8117
8118 @cindex error on valid input
8119 @item
8120 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8121
8122 @cindex invalid input
8123 @item
8124 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8125 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
8126 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
8127
8128 @item
8129 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
8130 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
8131 @end itemize
8132
8133 @node Bug Reporting
8134 @section How to Report Bugs
8135 @cindex bug reports
8136 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
8137
8138 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
8139 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
8140 contact that organization first.
8141
8142 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8143 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8144 distribution.
8145
8146 @ifset BUGURL
8147 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
8148 to @value{BUGURL}.
8149 @end ifset
8150
8151 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8152 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8153 fact or leave it out, state it!
8154
8155 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
8156 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
8157 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
8158 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
8159 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
8160 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
8161 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
8162 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8163 and the most helpful.
8164
8165 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
8166 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
8167 that the bug has not been reported previously.
8168
8169 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8170 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8171 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8172 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8173
8174 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8175
8176 @itemize @bullet
8177 @item
8178 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
8179 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
8180
8181 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8182 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
8183
8184 @item
8185 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
8186
8187 @item
8188 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8189 version number.
8190
8191 @item
8192 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
8193 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8194
8195 @item
8196 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
8197 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
8198 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8199
8200 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8201 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8202
8203 @item
8204 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
8205 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
8206 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
8207 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
8208 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
8209 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
8210 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
8211
8212 @item
8213 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8214 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8215
8216 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
8217 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8218 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
8219 make a mistake.
8220
8221 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8222 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8223 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8224 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
8225 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8226 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
8227 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8228 observations.
8229
8230 @item
8231 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8232 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8233 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
8234 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8235 by line number.
8236
8237 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8238 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8239 @end itemize
8240
8241 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8242
8243 @itemize @bullet
8244 @item
8245 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8246
8247 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8248 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8249 changes will not affect it.
8250
8251 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8252 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8253 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8254 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8255
8256 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8257 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8258 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8259 less time, and so on.
8260
8261 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8262 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8263
8264 @item
8265 A patch for the bug.
8266
8267 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8268 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8269 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8270 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8271
8272 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8273 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8274 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8275 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8276
8277 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8278 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8279 help us to understand.
8280
8281 @item
8282 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8283
8284 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8285 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8286 @end itemize
8287
8288 @node Acknowledgements
8289 @chapter Acknowledgements
8290
8291 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8292 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
8293 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
8294 @c (October 2012),
8295 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8296
8297 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8298 more details?}
8299
8300 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8301 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8302 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8303
8304 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8305 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8306 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8307 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8308 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8309 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8310 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8311 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8312 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8313 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8314
8315 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8316 in format-specific I/O modules.
8317
8318 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
8319 has done much work with it since.
8320
8321 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8322
8323 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8324
8325 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8326 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8327
8328 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8329 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8330 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8331 support a.out format.
8332
8333 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8334 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8335 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8336 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8337 targets.
8338
8339 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8340 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8341 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8342 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8343 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8344 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8345 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8346
8347 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
8348 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8349 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8350 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8351
8352 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8353
8354 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8355
8356 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8357 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8358 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8359 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8360
8361 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8362 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8363 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8364 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8365 and some initial 64-bit support).
8366
8367 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8368
8369 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8370 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8371
8372 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8373 flavors.
8374
8375 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8376 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8377
8378 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8379 configuration enhancements.
8380
8381 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8382
8383 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8384 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8385 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8386 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8387
8388 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8389 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8390 @include fdl.texi
8391
8392 @node AS Index
8393 @unnumbered AS Index
8394
8395 @printindex cp
8396
8397 @bye
8398 @c Local Variables:
8399 @c fill-column: 79
8400 @c End:
This page took 0.202724 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.